Definium Amx 700

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 240

TM

5161515-1EN
Rev. 6 (10 February 2008)
Operator Manual
X-Ray System

© 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.


Definium AMX 700

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Table of Contents

Table of Contents

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Chapter 1: About this Guide
About the Definium AMX 700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
Graphic Conventions and Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Safety Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3

Chapter 2: Safety and Regulatory


X-Ray Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
Radiation Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Certified Electrical Contractor Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Regulatory Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Disposal of Waste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Good Operating Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
IEC 60601-1 Classifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Applicable Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Chapter 3: Hardware Overview
Unit Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
Control and Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Hand Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
TechSwitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Test the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Replace Transmitter Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Clean Transmitter Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Dose Area Product (DAP) Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
External CD Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Chapter 4: Moving and Positioning


Turn Unit On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
Drive the Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
Position the Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Mechanical Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Latch Lock Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Adjust Column and Telescoping Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Rotate the Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Adjust the Collimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) TOC-1
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents

Chapter 5: Taking Exposures


Taking Exposures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Technique Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2

Chapter 6: Charging the Batteries


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
Capacity Gauge Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
“Stuck at Full” Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Emergency Capacity Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Recharge Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Battery Drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Bar Graph Display vs. Battery Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Application Tip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
How to Re-Charge Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Main Power Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6

Chapter 7: Maintenance and Service


Cleaning the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Periodic Maintenance by Service Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
Qualified Service Available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2

Chapter 8: Messages on Display

Appendix A: GE Portable DR Detector Operating Instructions

A1: Detector Overview


Detector Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-2
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-2
Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-3
Electronics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-3
Physical Appearance / Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-3
Nameplates and Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-3
Detector Safety Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-4
Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-5
Detector Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-5
Indicator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-5
Electro-magnetic Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-6
Detector Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-7
Grid Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-7

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) TOC-2
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents

Handling and Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-8


Detector Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-8
Tether Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-9

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Grid Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-9
Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-10
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-11
Detector Size and Weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-11
Environmental Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-11
A2: General Information
Virtual Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-2
International Language Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-3
Software Start Up and Shutdown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-4
Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-4
Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-4
Login and Log off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-5
Standard Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-5
Invalid Password Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-6
Emergency Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-6
Inactivity Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-7

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Log Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-7
Wireless Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-7
Software Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-8
System Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-9
Lead Markers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-9
System Status and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-10
Expose Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-10
System Status Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-10
Message Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-11
A3: Worklist
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-1
Patient List Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-6
Manage List / Find Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-7
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-7
Sort by Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-7
Filter List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-8
Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-11
Manual Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-11
Auto Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-11
Select Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-12
Select a Single Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-12
Select Multiple Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-12
Delete Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-12
Delete a Single Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-13
Delete All Completed, Discontinued, and Local Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-13
Delete Suspended Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-14

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) TOC-3
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents

Add / Edit Patient Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-15


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-15
Add Patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-18

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Edit Patient Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-19
A4: Image Acquisition
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4-1
Re-start Completed or Discontinued Exams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4-6
Resume Suspended Exams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4-7
Select or Change Protocols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4-7
Conduct a Digital Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4-9
Conduct a Cassette Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4-10
Conduct an Emergency Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4-12
End Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4-13
Suspend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4-13
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4-14
Discontinue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4-14
A5: Image Viewer
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-1
Tool Panel Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-4

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Select Images to View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-5
Change Image Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-6
Adjust Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-7
Annotate and Mask Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-9
Customize System Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-12
Add Image Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-13
Delete Image Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-15
Adjust Image Shutter (Crop Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-15
Automatic Shutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-16
Re-process Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-17
Determine if Images should be Retaken (DEI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-18
Corrective Actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-20
Exceptions to Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-20
Change Pointer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-21
Apply Quality Check Indicator (Auto Tag) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-22
Print Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-22
Auto Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-22
Manual Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-22
Print Multiple Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-23
Print Current Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-24
Send Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-27
Save Changes to Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-27

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) TOC-4
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents

A6: Image Management


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6-1
View Patient Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6-7

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Load Images from a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6-7
Synchronize to HIS or RIS or PACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6-8
Search List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6-8
Sort by Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6-8
Open Exams and Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6-9
Copy Exams and Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6-9
Copy Exams to a Network Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6-9
Copy Images to Another Exam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6-10
Copy Exams to a CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6-12
Delete Exams, Series, or Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6-13
Lock Exams from Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6-14
Unlock Exams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6-14
Make Exam Anonymous (De-Identify) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6-14
A7: Set Preferences
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-2
Network Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-2

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Add or Edit Network Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-3
Remove Network Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-6
Perform C-Echo Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-7
Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-7
Add or Edit DICOM Printers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-8
Remove DICOM Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-12
Worklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-13
Default Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-13
Auto Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-15
Preset Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-15
Add Preset Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-16
Edit Preset Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-16
Remove Preset Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-17
Image Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-18
Copy Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-18
Auto Tag (Quality Check). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-19
Auto Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-19
Auto Send (Auto Push) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-22
Auto Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-23
Image Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-25
Configure Pre-set Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-25
Add Pre-set Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-26
Edit Pre-set Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-26
Remove Pre-set Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-27

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) TOC-5
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents

DEI (Detector Exposure Index) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-28


Change the DEI Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-29
Change the Lower and Upper Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-29

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Enable or Disable Technical Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-30
Export DEI Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-30
Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-30
Image Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-31
Change Default Factory Looks for Exams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-31
Build Custom Looks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-32
Change Image Processing from the Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-36
Tissue Equalization Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-36
TE Usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-37
Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-39
Backup Protocol Database to CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-40
Retrieve Protocol Database from CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-41
Edit Protocol Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-41
Add or Edit Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-42
Add or Edit Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-43
Add or Edit View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-44
Protocol Editor Copy Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-49

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Copy Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-49
Copy Exam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-50
Copy View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-50
A8: Quality Assurance Process and Maintenance
Types of Quality Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8-1
When to Perform Quality Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8-2
Detector Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8-2
QAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8-2
Quality Test Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8-2
Perform Detector Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8-3
Failed Detector Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8-5
Perform QAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8-5
Failed QAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8-10
Result History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8-11
Maintenance and Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8-12
Periodic Maintenance by Service Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8-12
Preventative Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8-12
Cleaning and Disinfecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8-13
Detector Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8-13

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) TOC-6
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents

Appendix B: Login Administration


Enabling EA3 Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Understanding Local and Enterprise Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Understanding Privileges, Groups, and Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Administering Groups and Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Accessing the Login Administration Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3
Working with Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
Add Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
Assign Privileges to Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
Remove Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
Show Protected Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
Working with Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-7
Add Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-7
Assign Users to Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-8
Change User Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-8
Remove Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-9
Show Protected Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-9
Viewing the Audit Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
Administering System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Change Display Settings and Enable Enterprise Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Configure Enterprise Authorization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
Configure Audit Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
Use LDAP Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) TOC-7
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Medical Device Directive

Medical Device Directive

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Documentation, trademark and the software are copyright reserved. Under the copyright laws, the
documentation may not be photocopied, reproduced, translated, or reduced by any electronic machine
to a readable form, in whole or part, without the prior written permission of General Electric Company.
The original language of this manual is English.
The General Electric Company reserves the right to revise this manual and to make changes in the
content of it without notify any person of such revision or changes.
European registered place of business:
GE Medical Systems Europe
Quality Assurance Manager
BP 34
F 78533 BUC CEDEX
Green QSD 1990 Standard issued by MDD (Medical Devices Directorate, Department of Health, UK).
Medical Device Good Manufacturing Practice Manual issued by the FDA (Food and Drug Administration,
Department of Health, USA).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL), an independent testing laboratory.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), international standards organization, when applicable.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) i
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Contact Information

Contact Information

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
United States address:
GE Healthcare
3000 N Grandview Ave
Waukesha WI 53188-1696 US

Phone number:
United States: 262-544-3011
International: +1-262-544-3011

Web address:
www.gehealthcare.com

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) ii
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Revision History

Revision History

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Rev Pages
Date Reason for Change
# Affected
1 09 Dec. 2005 All Initial release.
2 27 Mar. 2006 1-1 Updated description of unit.
2-5 Inserted warning about inserting fingers into the Ethernet port.
3-2 Added cross-references in table 3-1.
Added wireless antenna information in table 3-1.
3-3 Added cross-references in table 3-1.
3-4 Added notes and information about the detector bin in table 3-1.
3-5 Inserted warning about inserting fingers into the Ethernet port in table 3-1.
5-3 Procedure re-written (all text before figure 5-2).
6-3 Battery drain percentages revised, figure 6-2 replaced.
6-4 Removed note before “Bar Graph Display vs. Battery Loading” section
Updated Approximate Discharge Rate and Typical Daily Usage numbers in table
6-2.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


6-5 Figure 6-3 replaced.
6-6 Added 2 “IMPORTANT!” notes after step 5.
6-7 Moved “Main Power Circuit Breaker” information from the Maintenance and
Service chapter.
Figure 6-5 replaced.
7-1 Switched order of “Maintenance” and “Messages” chapters.
7-2 Updated descriptions of “Battery Too Low” and “Charge Required” messages in
table 7-1.
8-1 Updated approved cleaning chemical list.
A1-5 Added weight in kilograms caution in Figure A1-3.
A1-6 Updated table A1-2, detector status lights.
A1-7 updated list “Do not do”.
A1-8 Updated external ambient temperature range in table A1-3.
A1-10 Removed references to the grid holder.
A1-11 Added grid handling instructions.
A2-3 Added start up instructions.
A2-7/8 Added wireless network connection section.
A2-9 Added step to system reset procedure (step 3).
A2-11 Removed paragraph before figure A2-10.
A3-6 Added “network connection status” and “wireless network connection status”
rows to table A3-1.
A3-8 Corrected description of Accession number in table A3-2.
A3-9 Corrected first bullet below step 3.
A3-20 Corrected description of Accession number in table A3-4.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) iii
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Revision History

Rev Pages
Date Reason for Change

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
# Affected
2 (continued) A4-2 Changed the warning into a note in the “switch screen tab” row of table A4-1.
A4-4 Removed Small and Large Pediatric from the list of patient sizes in table A4-1.
A4-6 Added “wireless connection status” row to table A4-1.
A4-10 Removed Small and Large Pediatric from the list of patient sizes in note below
step 3.
A4-11 Added tech switch to step 11.
Added screen text to paragraph before figure A4-7.
A4-12 Added note and process before step 1.
A4-12 Added step 4.
Corrected step 5.
Added note after step 5.
A5-4 Added “network connection status” and “wireless network connection status”
rows to table A5-1.
A6-4 Added descriptions of “PACS Test Images” and “TG-18 Samples” to Image Tools
row of table A6-1.
Added to the description of “Patient Information” button in table A6-1

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


A6-5 Added “network connection status” and “wireless network connection status”
rows to table A6-1.
A7-7 Added wireless network connection trouble shooting steps to “Failed C-echo
Test”.
A7-30 Updated steps 2-4.
A7-32 Added “Enable or Disable Technical Mode” section.
A7-33 Added Exam section.
A7-35 Updated step 6.
A8-3 Updated note at top of page.
Added last bullet to list under “Quality Test Preparation”.
A8-4 Updated step 2.
A8-7 Added paragraph and IMPORTANT note before figure A8-8.
A8-8 Updated step 2.
Updated note below step 4.
A8-9 Updated caption of figure A8-12.
A8-9 -- 11 Re-wrote process steps 5-13.
A8-15 Updated approved cleaning chemicals list.
Added Grid Cleaning section.
B-15 Updated second, third, and fourth paragraphs of section.
3 12 Jul. 2006 2-5 Added new warning in accordance with FDA requirements.
Deleted redundant caution.
6-3 Changed “Slow Charging” to “Standby Mode” and updated description of
function.
6-5 Changed “Slow Charging” to “Standby Mode” and updated procedure.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) iv
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Revision History

Rev Pages
Date Reason for Change

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
# Affected
3 (continued) 8-2 Changed row in table 8-1, “SLOW CHARGING” to “STANDBY” and updated
description of message.
A2-2 Replaced figure A2-1.
A2-4 Added cross-references to “Software Reset” section.
A2-8 Added new procedure for switching between wired and wireless connections.
A2-8 Added note that software reset does not require shut down or reset.
A6-12 Removed that CD-RW disks may be used to copy exams, added note that the
system cannot write to CD-RW disks.
A6-13 Added new step 8 to confirm that images have been written to the CD.
A7-1 Re-wrote chapter introduction.
A7-14 -- 15 Added notes in table A7-6, in the “Plus Previous” and “Plus Future” rows.
A7-26 Changed text in table A7-9, clarified what happens to images without the Auto
Tag mark upon auto delete.
A7-31 Added new descriptions of DEI displays to the options listed after step 2.
A7-32 Changed description of Technical Mode.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


A7-33 -- 40 Re ordered the Image Processing sections, updated information to match current
system.
A7-44 Removed that CD-RW disks may be used to copy protocol database, added note
that the system cannot write to CD-RW disks.
A7-50 Removed “Unpaired” as an option for Laterality.
B-13 Changed text in table B-1, row Inactivity Timeout. Added that this function is not
implemented and that changing the settings may cause conflicts with system
software. Removed most of the description.
4 29 Sep. 2006 All Miscellaneous typographical and grammatical corrections.
3-4 Deleted information from table 3-1, row 15, regarding opening and closing the
detector bin. Unit design has changed so that it is always open.
4-4 Deleted information from step 3 regarding closing the detector bin.
4-7 Inserted note regarding that the tether should be removed from the column
holder before rotating the column.
7-1 Added cross-reference to Chapter A1: Detector Overview-Handling and Cleaning.
A1-1 -- 13 Re-ordered chapter to better suit end-user needs.
A1-2 Corrected information in “Detector Functions” section.
A1-3 Corrected information in “Panel” section.
Corrected information in “Electronics” section.
Corrected information in “Physical Appearance / Finish” section.
A1-4 Corrected information in “Nameplates and Markings” section.
Corrected information in “Detector Alignment” section.
A1-5 Updated information in table A1-1.
A1-6 Added section on “Electro-magnetic Interference”.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) v
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Revision History

Rev Pages
Date Reason for Change

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
# Affected
4 (continued) A1-7 Moved “Detector Grid” section and added information that the arrow indicates
line direction.
Added sentence to be careful to not pinch fingers or clothing when putting the
grid on the detector.
A1-8 Corrected warning to not swing detector into corners.
Corrected text to check the detector for cracks.
Added item to end of list to not use a defibrillator when the detector is in contact
with the detector.
Corrected text regarding the detector finish.
Added warning to keep the detector away from large amount of liquid and that
the detector cannot be immersed.
A1-9 Added new section on tether handling and care.
Changed the cross-reference in the “Grid Handling” section.
A1-9 --10 Added new section on cleaning the detector, grid, and tether.
A1-10 Corrected the specifications in table A1-2.
A8-2 Deleted table A8-1, removed information about testing factors.
A8-5 --14 Replaced all figures with new images.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


A8-11 Corrected failed QAP information.
A8-14 Removed most text from “Cleaning” section and replaced it with a cross-
reference to Chapter A1: Detector Overview-Cleaning.
5 17 Nov. 2006 A5-4 Changed “Dose Exposure Indicator” to “Dose Exposure Index”.
A5-21 --22
A7-30 --32
6 10 Feb. 2008 7-1 Added Bleach (50% solution) to list of approved cleaning agents.
Changed maximum solution strength of Isopropyl Alcohol to 70%.
A1-10 Added Bleach (50% solution) to list of approved cleaning agents.
Changed maximum solution strength of Isopropyl Alcohol to 70%.
A2-3 Added international keyboard configuration.
A4-10 Updated number of seconds for acquired image to appear on the Viewer screen.
A5-20 Added additional guidance for correcting high and low DEI.
B-13 Added clarification about inactivity time out.
All Miscellaneous grammatical and typographical corrections.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) vi
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 1: About this Guide

Chapter 1: About this Guide

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
This chapter explains the purpose and design of this Learning and Reference Guide. It is an introduction
to the guide, providing information on the purpose, prerequisite skills, guide organization, chapter
format, and graphic conventions that identify the visual symbols used throughout the guide.
The instructions in this operation manual are for use with the Definium AMX 700, model numbers
5151481-3 and 5151481-4
Topics covered include:
• About the Definium AMX 700 (p. 1-1)
• Safety Information (p. 1-1)
• Graphic Conventions and Legends (p. 1-2)
• Safety Notices (p. 1-3)

About the Definium AMX 700


The Definium AMX 700 is a mobile x-ray machine that acquires digital radiographic images with the

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


same quality as a full scale x-ray room.
Figure 1-1 Definium AMX 700 in use

Safety Information
Please refer to Chapter 2: Safety and Regulatory in this Learning and Reference Guide. The Safety
chapter describes the safety information you and the physicians must understand thoroughly before you
begin to use the system. Note that you will find additional safety information throughout your Learning
and Reference Guide. If you need additional training, seek assistance from qualified GE Medical Systems
or GE Healthcare personnel. The equipment is intended for use by qualified personnel only. This guide
should be kept with the equipment and be readily available at all times. It is important for you to
periodically review the procedures and safety precautions. It is important for you to read and understand
the contents of this guide before attempting to use this product.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 1-1
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 1: About this Guide

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Graphic Conventions and Legends
Table 1-1 describes the conventions used when working with menus, buttons, text boxes and keyboard
keys.
Table 1-1 Conventions for menus, buttons, text boxes, and keyboard keys

Convention Description

Select • Marking an option in a group of check boxes or radial buttons


• Choosing an option from a drop-down list
• Activating a tab
• Highlighting text
• Highlighting row items

Press [START EXAM] Pressing a button on a workstation screen.

In the Matrix text box,... The name of text box in which you can select or type text or the

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


name of a drop-down list from which you select an option.

Type DICOMAE in the... Text you enter into a text box.

Select Preferences > The path of selecting option(s) in a tree structure.


Worklist.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 1-2
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 1: About this Guide

Safety Notices
The following safety notices are used to emphasize certain safety instructions. This guide uses the

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
international symbol along with the danger, warning, or caution message. This section also describes the
purpose of a Note.

DANGER: Danger is used to identify conditions or actions for which a specific hazard is known to
exist which will cause severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage if the
instructions are ignored.

WARNING: Warning is used to identify conditions or actions for which a specific hazard is known to
exist which may cause severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage if
the instructions are ignored.

CAUTION: Caution is used to identify conditions or actions for which a potential hazard may exist

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


which will or can cause minor personal injury or property damage if the instructions are
ignored.
NOTE: A Note provides additional information that is helpful to you. It may emphasize certain information
regarding special tools or techniques, items to check before proceeding, or factors to consider
about a concept or task.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 1-3
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 2: Safety and Regulatory

Chapter 2: Safety and Regulatory

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
This chapter explains the safety considerations, general equipment and patient related precautions, and
the symbols used for the safe operation of your equipment. This chapter also includes information about
the emergency procedures.
This chapter presents the concepts necessary to operate your system safely.
Topics covered include:
• X-Ray Protection (p. 2-1)
• Certified Electrical Contractor Statement (p. 2-3)
• Regulatory Requirements (p. 2-3)
• Disposal of Waste (p. 2-4)
• Safety First (p. 2-4)
• Good Operating Practices (p. 2-5)
• IEC 60601-1 Classifications (p. 2-6)
• Applicable Symbols (p. 2-6)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


X-Ray Protection
X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained
should be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt
to place this equipment in operation. GE Healthcare, will be glad to assist and cooperate in placing this
equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the
useful beam, no practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical
design compel the operator to take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons
carelessly exposing themselves or others to radiation.
It is important that everyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully
acquainted with the recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and
Measurements as published in NCRP Reports available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue,
Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the International Commission on Radiation Protection,
and take adequate steps to protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that GE Healthcare, its agents, and representatives have
no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment.
Various protective material and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.

CAUTION: United States Federal law restricts this device to use by or on the order of a physician.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 2-1
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 2: Safety and Regulatory

Radiation Protection
This device emits x-ray radiation for medical purposes. Each Definium AMX 700 has been tested for

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
leakage radiation and the test results are recorded in the final test protocol. As radiation is harmful to
human body, the necessary safety precautions must be observed and the radiation protection
regulations of individual countries must be complied with. The user must have a permission to use x-ray
device for diagnostic purposes.
Scattered radiation is produced during x-ray examinations, this is why radiation protection means should
be used. Prior to examination, it is recommended to make sure that the physician knows if the female
patient is pregnant. If someone has to be close to the patient, protective clothing must be used.
Additional protection against scattered radiation is achieved when using the hand exposure switch at
not less than 2 meters from the focal spot and the x-ray beam. The full extended spiral cable length of
the hand switch is approximately 4 meters.

CAUTION: The x-ray beam may extend beyond the primary protective shielding. Use lead backed
cassettes or digital detector. Do not stand behind the receptor and/or in-line with the x-
ray beam.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


CAUTION: There should be no people other than the patient in the exam room during x-ray exposure.
If circumstances require another person to enter the room while x-ray exposures are
planned or possible, that person should wear a lead apron in accordance with accepted
safety practices.

CAUTION: Use the largest possible focal spot-to-skin distance to keep the patient absorbed dose as
small as possible.

CAUTION: This x-ray unit may be dangerous to patient and operator unless correct exposure factors
and operating instructions are observed.

CAUTION: Always provide necessary radiation protection for your patient and yourself when oper-
ating any x-ray system.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 2-2
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 2: Safety and Regulatory

Certified Electrical Contractor Statement


All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the
Power Distribution Unit shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between
pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Medical
personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated,
and special engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE
will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply
with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel
of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical
servicing on the equipment.

CAUTION: Only trained and qualified personnel should be permitted access to the internal parts of
the Definium AMX 700 or its associated assemblies.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Regulatory Requirements
NOTE: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. The equipment may
cause radio frequency interference to other medical and non-medical devices and radio
communications. To provide reasonable protection against such interference, the Definium AMX
700 complies with emissions limits for a Group 1, Class A Medical Devices as stated in EN 60601-1-2.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment is found to cause interference (which may be determined by switching the equipment on and
off), the user (or qualified service personnel) should attempt to correct the problem by one or more of the
following measure(s):
• Reorient or relocate the affected device(s).
• Increase the separating space between the equipment and the affected device.
• Power the equipment from a source different from that of the affected device.
• Consult the point of purchase or service representative for further suggestions.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any interference caused either by the use of interconnect cables
other than those recommended, or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment.
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
To comply with the regulations applicable to an electromagnetic interface for a Group 1, Class A Medical
Device, all interconnect cables to peripheral devices must be shielded and properly grounded. Use of
cables not properly shielded and grounded may result in the equipment causing radio frequency
interference in violation of the European Union Medical Device directive and FCC regulations.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 2-3
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 2: Safety and Regulatory

Disposal of Waste
This symbol indicates that the waste of electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of as

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. Please contact an authorized
representative of the manufacturer for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment.
Figure 2-1 Disposal of Waste symbol

Safety First
This equipment is to be used by authorized medical personnel only.
Your Definium AMX 700 is engineered for years of reliable service. To promote optimum safety, be sure to
read this manual carefully, before operating the unit.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


WARNING: This X-Ray unit may be dangerous to patient and operator, unless safe exposure factors,
operating instructions and maintenance schedules are observed.
To be used by authorized personnel only.

WARNING: Electric shock hazard. To prevent possible electric shock, do not insert fingers inside the
RJ 45 connector (Ethernet port). Refer to Chapter 3: Hardware Overview-Unit Features
(p. 3-1) for more information about the location of the Ethernet port.

CAUTION: Always be alert to safety when you operate this equipment. You must be familiar enough
with the equipment to recognize any malfunctions that can be a hazard. If a malfunction
occurs or a safety problem is known to exist, isolate the unit to avoid unauthorized
operation, and do not use this equipment until qualified personnel correct the problem.

CAUTION: The Definium AMX 700 is not connected to protective earth ground while in use. For the
safety of the patient and operator, only devices that are certified to the appropriate safety
standards for medical devices and in good working order are to be used in proximity to the
Definium AMX 700.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 2-4
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 2: Safety and Regulatory

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
CAUTION: THIS SYSTEM IS NOT DESIGNED FOR USE IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TO A DEFIBRILLATOR!
Never use a defibrillator on a patient that remains in contact with the digital detector or
any part of the mobile x-ray system. This system must be treated as a conductive surface
and moved well away from a patient before defibrillation is attempted. If any part of the
mobile x-ray system remains in contact with a patient when the defibrillator is
discharged, voltage may be conducted through the patient’s body and into the system.
This may be hazardous to anyone who may come in contact with the system, and could
damage the detector.
Always consult the instructions for use of any defibrillator that may be used on a patient
being imaged by this digital mobile x-ray system.

CAUTION: If the GE Portable DR Detector is used in a fixed installation, it is the User’s responsibility
to provide the means for audio and visual communication between the Operator and the
patient.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


CAUTION: If you suspect any electromagnetic interference affecting or caused by the unit, call
service. Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect medical electrical
equipment.

CAUTION: This equipment is not rated for use in the presence of flammable gases.

Good Operating Practices


• Wear a lead apron while performing an x-ray exam.
• Step back at least 6 feet (1.8 meters) from the tube or to the full extension of the hand switch cord
before making an exposure.
• Always use the proper field sizes and technic factors for each procedure to minimize x-ray exposure
and produce the best diagnostic results.
• Check the digital display carefully before making an exposure: verify that the selected technique is
the intended technique. Pay particular attention to the placement of the decimal point in the mAs
setting to insure that whole numbers are not mistaken for an intended mAs fractional number.
• When x-raying bed patients, move them as far as possible from nearby patients.
• Ask visitors to step outside the room during an exposure.
• Use gonadal shields for patients whenever possible.
• Be sure to read and follow the maintenance schedule outlined in the Maintenance and Service
section of this manual.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 2-5
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 2: Safety and Regulatory

• Under most conditions, cumulative radiation dose to the operator will not exceed recommended
maximum permissible levels. However, as with all radiation-producing devices, a qualified radiation
expert should evaluate situations involving frequent exposures using high kVp and mAs technics to

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
determine if extra protective devices are necessary.

IEC 60601-1 Classifications


• Type of protection against electric shock: Class I, Internally Powered
• Degree of protection against electric shock: Type B Applied Part
• Degree of protection against ingress of water: Ordinary
• Mode of operation: Continuous

Applicable Symbols
Table 2-1 Symbols

Symbol Definition

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


This symbol on the equipment means that the accompanying operating instructions
should be consulted to assure safe operation.

Store and operate the detector within the range of 0° to 50°C (32°-122°F) to avoid
damage.

To avoid damage do not place a load in excess of 160kg (350lb) on the detector.

In accordance with UL 60601-1, the Definium AMX 700, is classified as Type B


Equipment, Class I Equipment, Internally Powered Equipment, Ordinary Equipment
and continuous operation. Type B Equipment provides an adequate degree of
protection against electric shock, in particular regarding:
• allowable leakage current,
• reliability of the protective earth connection

Dangerous voltage. Indicates an avoidable dangerous high voltage hazard.

Alternating Current. Indicates equipment that is suitable for alternating current only.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 2-6
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 2: Safety and Regulatory

Symbol Definition

Protective earth (ground). Identifies any terminal which is intended for connection of

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
an external protective conductor to protect against electrical shock in case of a fault.

Functional Earth (ground) Terminal. Terminal directly connected to a point of a


measuring supply or control circuit or to a screening part which is intended to be
earthed for functional purposes.

Battery power off. This does not remove mains voltage.

Battery power on. This does not apply mains voltage.

Indicates radiographic control.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Indicates non-ionizing radiation is present.

Indicates ionizing radiation is present.

X-ray emission. X-ray tube head is emitting x-rays. Take adequate precautions to
prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly, unwisely, or unknowingly exposing
themselves or others to radiation.

Indicates positioning lock or brake release.

Indicates terminal and receptacle location for hand-held radiographic and light field
control.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 2-7
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 2: Safety and Regulatory

Symbol Definition

Control for indicating radiation field by using light.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Collimator blades closed. The controlled blades are shown in thicker lines.

Collimator blades open. The controlled blades are shown in thicker lines.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 2-8
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 3: Hardware Overview

Chapter 3: Hardware Overview

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Topics covered include:
• Unit Features (p. 3-1)
• Control and Display Panel (p. 3-5)
• Hand Switch (p. 3-6)
• TechSwitch (p. 3-7)
• Options and Accessories (p. 3-9)

Unit Features
Since the Definium AMX 700 is battery operated, there’s no need to plug in your mobile x-ray unit before
taking exposures. Battery operation makes the Definium AMX 700 easily adapted to operating, intensive
care, and emergency room applications.
Because of a dual-motor drive, driving and positioning the Definium AMX 700 requires minimum effort.
And the control panel’s cut-away design permits optimum visibility for steering down crowded corridors.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


The self-stopping bumper, one of many built-in safety devices, helps prevent unwanted mobility—the
motors stop and the brakes activate upon contact with another object.
Table 3-1 describes the Definium AMX 700 features shown in Figure 3-1.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 3-1
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 3: Hardware Overview

Figure 3-1 Definium AMX 700 back and front


Back Front

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
Table 3-1 Definium AMX 700 features

Item Description

1 Tube head. Refer to Chapter 4: Moving and Positioning-Position the Tube (p. 4-5) for more
information.

2 Collimator controls. Refer to Chapter 4: Moving and Positioning-Adjust the Collimator (p. 4-7)
for more information.

3 Collimator skin spacing bars.

4 Tube latch mechanism. Locks the tube head down during transport. Refer to Chapter 4:
Moving and Positioning-Latch Lock Release (p. 4-5) for more information.

5 Wireless antenna. Connects the unit to the facility network for the transfer of images and HIS
or RIS data. Refer to Chapter A2: General Information-Wireless Network Connection (p. A2-7)
for more information about using the wireless connection.

6 Telescopic arm. The arm extends for tube placement. Refer to Chapter 4: Moving and
Positioning-Adjust Column and Telescoping Arm (p. 4-6) for more information.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 3-2
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 3: Hardware Overview

Item Description

7 Column. The column rotates for tube placement. The tube moves vertically on the column.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Refer to Chapter 4: Moving and Positioning-Adjust Column and Telescoping Arm (p. 4-6) for
more information.

8 LCD touch screen. The screen provides the means to take and view x-rays. Refer to Appendix
A: GE Portable DR Detector Operating Instructions for more information.

9 On/Off Key Switch. Refer to Chapter 4: Moving and Positioning-Turn Unit On (p. 4-1) for more
information.

10 Display and control panel. Displays the status of the battery charge. When in acquisition
mode, displays the currently selected kVp and mAs and any system status messages or
errors. Refer to Control and Display Panel (p. 3-5) for more information.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


11 Hand switch for initiating exposures. Refer to Hand Switch (p. 3-6) for more information.
NOTE: Some models may have a wireless “TechSwitch” in addition to the hand switch. Refer
to TechSwitch (p. 3-7) for more information.

12 Drive handle. Grasp the drive handle and squeeze the release bar to move the unit.Refer to
Chapter 4: Moving and Positioning-Drive the Unit (p. 4-1) for more information.

13 USB ports (between the drive handle and the detector). Allow you to connect USB accessory
devices, such as an external CD drive. There are also two USB ports on the front of the unit.
Refer to item 18.

14 GE Portable DR Detector and grid. Refer to Appendix A: GE Portable DR Detector Operating


Instructions for more information.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 3-3
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 3: Hardware Overview

Item Description

15 Detector bin. Provides a space to keep the detector and grid.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
NOTE: The detector must be placed in the bin before driving the unit. The bin contains sensors
to determine if the detector is in the bin. If the detector is not in the bin, the unit will not
drive at full speed.
NOTE: Make sure that the detector is in the bin before beginning a cassette exam. Exposures
will be inhibited if the detector is placed in the bin after the exam has begun. To clear
the inhibit, either:
– Select a different view and then reselect the view you wish to perform (recom-
mended).
– Remove the detector from the bin for the duration of the exam.
Refer to Chapter A4: Image Acquisition-Conduct a Cassette Exam (p. A4-10) for more
information.

16 Front wheels.

17 Detector tether holder. Provides a place to wrap the tether cord during transport or when

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


being stored.

18 Ports

1. USB ports. Allow you to connect USB accessory devices, such as an external CD drive.
There are also two USB ports on the back of the unit. Refer to item 13.
2. Ethernet network port. Connects the unit to the facility network for the transfer of images
and HIS or RIS data.

WARNING: Electric shock hazard. To prevent possible electric shock, do not insert fingers
inside the RJ 45 connector (Ethernet port).

19 Detector tether. Connects the detector to the unit. Refer to Appendix A: GE Portable DR
Detector Operating Instructions for more information.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 3-4
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 3: Hardware Overview

Item Description

20 Battery charging cord. The cord retracts into the body when moving. Refer to Chapter 6:

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Charging the Batteries for more information.

21 Main power circuit breaker. Refer to Chapter 6: Charging the Batteries-Main Power Circuit
Breaker (p. 6-6) for more information.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


22 Bumper. Automatically activates the brakes and turns off the drive motors upon contact, to
help prevent accidents.

Control and Display Panel


Display and control panel. Displays the status of the battery charge. When in acquisition mode, displays
the currently selected kVp and mAs and any system status messages or errors.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 3-5
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 3: Hardware Overview

Figure 3-2 Control and display panel

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
Table 3-2 Control and display panel functions.

Item Description

1 kVp and mAs technique display when in acquisition mode.

2 Exposure indicator light. Lights up when exposures are taken.

3 Battery capacity indicator.

4 Battery charging status, system status, or error message display.

5 kVp and mAs technique controls (acquisition mode).

Hand Switch
Exposures are made with the console hand switch. The Prep/Expose button on this switch has three
positions: OFF, PREP, and EXPOSE.
Some units may have a wireless TechSwitch to be used instead of the hand switch shown in Figure 3-3.
Refer to TechSwitch (p. 3-7) for information.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 3-6
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 3: Hardware Overview

Figure 3-3 Hand switch


1. PREP

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
2. EXPOSE
3. Collimator Lamp Switch

Table 3-3 Hand switch button positions

Position Description

OFF The OFF position is when no pressure is applied to the Prep/Expose button
on top of the hand switch.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


PREP PREP is the next position on the hand switch. When it is partially pressed, it
brings the rotor up to speed and heats the filament. PREP also checks the
system interlocks and verifies the system is ready to make an exposure.
The button returns to the OFF position if released.

EXPOSE The EXPOSE position is when the button on the hand switch is fully
depressed. This produces X-rays that are recorded. Release the Prep/
Expose button after the exposure is completed.

TechSwitch
The TechSwitch option may be purchased for use with the Definium AMX 700. The remote TechSwitch
can be used instead of the standard wired hand switch.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 3-7
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 3: Hardware Overview

Figure 3-4 TechSwitch


1. Transmitter

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
2. Cradle
3. Collimator Lamp Light button
4. Prep/Expose button

This section provides instructions for basic operation and maintenance of the TechSwitch. Refer to TS-
TIM (4D) for complete installation instructions, service information, and specifications. This document is
provided with the TechSwitch when purchased.
The TechSwitch has an operating range of 10.9 m (36+ feet) and operating radius of 180° relative to the
infrared sensor on the back of the unit. TechSwitch will not operate through doors or walls. You must be

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


in line of sight to the machine. TechSwitch will operate through windows and lead glass, but you must
observe all guidelines for radiation protection and safety.
1. Set up the X-ray unit as required, observing all necessary guidelines for radiation protection and
safety.
2. Take the TechSwitch transmitter out of its cradle.
3. Step back from the machine up to 10.9 m (36+ feet), and aim the transmitter at the infrared remote
sensor.
4. To turn on the collimator lamp, press the Field Light button on the transmitter (optional function).
5. To PREP, press and release the Prep/Expose button on the transmitter. When the green 'Ready'
indicator light on the X-ray machine control panel illuminates, you may make an exposure.
6. To make an exposure, press the Prep/Expose button on the transmitter a second time, and hold it
down until the X-ray machine completes the exposure.
Š When the exposure is completed, an audible tone from the machine will sound, and the amber
'Exposure' indicator light on the control panel will illuminate.
Š After the exposure is completed, both the X-ray unit and TechSwitch system will automatically
return to standby.
7. Re-cradle the transmitter.
NOTE: The transmitter must be put back in the cradle within three (3) minutes after use. If not replaced,
the Remote Finder feature will activate, causing the transmitter to continuously sound a series of
beeps.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 3-8
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 3: Hardware Overview

NOTE: The Collimator Lamp automatically deactivates upon prep. The Prep Cycle automatically drops out
and returns to standby if an exposure is not initiated within ten (10) seconds, or if the collimator
lamp is turned on. The exposure is automatically discontinued if the Prep/Expose button is released

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
before exposure is complete.

Test the Battery


Activate the TechSwitch transmitter for five (5) seconds and observe the Low Battery Indicator. Should
the indicator illuminate, replace the battery.
To test the additional spare TechSwitch transmitter: Set-up the X-ray machine to recharge the batteries.
Observe the Green 'ON' LED on the internal TechSwitch PCB Electronics Package. With the Transmitter
Unit in hand step back at least 24 feet (7 meters) from the X-ray unit, and cycle the TechSwitch system,
observing the indicator lamps on the top panel of the PCB.
NOTE: No rotor boost or exposures will be made in this mode. Check to see that the TechSwitch system
functions reliably at this range. If not, a new battery is required. This test should be performed
quarterly or when a transmitter battery problem is suspected.

Replace Transmitter Battery

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Remove the six screws from the gray back cover of the TechSwitch transmitter. Place a new 9-volt
alkaline battery in the direction shown on the inside of the housing. Replace the back cover securing the
six screws.
NOTE: The battery should be replaced every two years under normal usage to ensure uninterrupted
operation.

Clean Transmitter Cradle


The TechSwitch remote Transmitter Unit and Transmitter Cradle have durable plastic casings that should
retain their appearance for many years. Both should be periodically cleaned with a soft cloth slightly
dampened with water and a mild soap or detergent.

Options and Accessories

Dose Area Product (DAP) Meter


Full field ion chamber with an integral display unit. The display unit contains electronics controlling total
dose area product, system reset and system test.
• Provides easy to read real time information on patient dose.
• Allows for simple manual transcription of this information into patient records.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 3-9
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 3: Hardware Overview

External CD Drive
A removable CD-recordable drive is provided with the Definium AMX 700. The CD drive is used for the

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
following tasks:
• Copying exams and images to a CD
• Loading images from a CD for viewing
• Backing up the protocol database or other system data
The CD drive connects to the unit through a USB port. Plug in the CD drive power supply and insert the
connection cable into any USB port.
NOTE: The Definium AMX 700 does not have a dedicated space or storage area for the CD drive. It is
recommended that the CD drive be disconnected and stored before moving the unit.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 3-10
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4: Moving and Positioning

Chapter 4: Moving and Positioning

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
This section describes how to drive the unit and position the x-ray tube for acquisitions.
Topics covered include:
• Turn Unit On (p. 4-1)
• Drive the Unit (p. 4-1)
• Position the Tube (p. 4-5)
• Mechanical Setup (p. 4-5)
• Latch Lock Release (p. 4-5)
– Adjust Column and Telescoping Arm (p. 4-6)
– Rotate the Tube (p. 4-7)
– Adjust the Collimator (p. 4-7)

Turn Unit On

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Refer to Chapter 7: Maintenance and Service-Periodic Maintenance by Service Personnel (p. 7-1) for
important information about the circuit breaker.
1. Turn the key switch to the ON position.
Figure 4-1 Key switch

Š The unit performs diagnostics (self-tests to make sure everything is working correctly). This
process takes a few seconds.
2. When the technique and battery status displays light up, the unit is ready for operation. TESTING
COMPLETE will also briefly appear on the message display.
Š The unit may take 3 minutes for the digital detector software to boot up. You may drive the unit
before the software finishes booting, but you cannot take acquisitions until the software is fully
booted.
3. If SYSTEM -- XX FAILED is displayed, turn the unit OFF then ON again. If SYSTEM -- XX FAILED displays
again, write down the alphanumeric code (XX represents the code) and contact your service
representative.

Drive the Unit


A compact design and dual motor assembly makes driving and maneuvering the Definium AMX 700 an
easy process.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 4-1
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4: Moving and Positioning

If moving down hallways or just traveling from one room to another, first make sure that the telescoping
arm is properly positioned and securely latched and that the detector is also in the detector bin so that
maximum speed can be reached.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Then, simply grip the drive handle (Figure 4-2) and steer the unit to your destination.
Figure 4-2 Drive handle

WARNING: Movement of the Definium AMX 700 x-ray unit could cause the horizontal arm to slide and
strike an operator or patient if not latched properly. Latch telescoping arm properly before

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


moving the unit.

WARNING: Do not drive or position the Definium AMX 700 unless standing directly behind it (Figure 4-
3). Failure to do this may result in loss of control causing serious injury and equipment
damage.
Figure 4-3 Proper driving position

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 4-2
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4: Moving and Positioning

The drive automatically adjusts to your pace, and can be pushed forward, turned or pulled in reverse at
speeds of up to 4.8 km per hour (3 m.p.h.).

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
A self-stopping bumper at the front of the unit automatically activates the brakes and turns off the drive
motors upon impact, to help prevent accidents. If the bumper is engaged, simply grip the drive handle
and pull the unit in reverse. (As with any mobile equipment, however, when driving the unit be sure to
exercise reasonable care.)
With the telescoping arm extended for a patient exam, the Definium AMX 700 pivots on the spot, rotating
and maneuvering easily for exact positioning. Again, grip the drive handle and turn the unit to the desired
position.
Definium AMX 700 maneuvering speed is automatically reduced by 50 percent when the telescoping arm
is extended or if the unit is driven when the detector is not in the detector bin.
Figure 4-4 Arm extended

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


To drive the Definium AMX 700, follow these steps:
1. Unplug the unit from the AC wall outlet and retract the cord, if necessary.
NOTE: Unit cannot be driven when plugged into the AC wall outlet.
2. Disconnect the network cable, if necessary.

CAUTION: Remove the network cable before moving the unit to prevent damage to the system, cable,
or facility network outlet.
3. Place the detector in the detector bin and wrap the tether, if necessary.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 4-3
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4: Moving and Positioning

4. Lock the telescoping arm into the park/transport position, if necessary.


Š In the park/transport position the telescoping arm is:

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
– completely pushed in;
– centered over the control panel (collimator skin spacers within well); and
– securely latched (Figure 4-5).
Figure 4-5 Telescoping arm latched

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


5. Turn the keyswitch to ON, if necessary.
6. Grip the drive handle to activate the motors and disengage the brakes. Now simply steer the unit, like
a shopping cart, to your destination.
Š When climbing inclines or moving over carpeting or other rough surfaces the drive motors will
automatically adjust to the floor surface.
Š When descending inclines or pushing the Definium AMX 700 to make it go faster, it may stop and
display the message RELEASE HANDLE. If this happens, release the handle to clear the message
and then continue with normal operation.
7. To stop the unit and activate the brakes, release your grip on the drive handle. Remember that the
self-stopping bumper, upon impact, will turn off the drive motors and activate the brakes.
Š To reverse the unit, grip the drive handle and pull backwards. If the self-stopping bumper is
engaged, after a brief pause reverse the unit.
Š To turn a sharp corner or rotate the unit, push one side of the drive handle (to the right or left) and
pull on the other. The unit will turn or pivot easily.
If the drive motors should fail, press and hold the BRAKE RELEASE button (Figure 4-6), located just below
the DRIVE HANDLE on the left bracket. Manually relocate the unit, and call service.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 4-4
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4: Moving and Positioning

Figure 4-6 Brake release button

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
NOTE: The unit may be driven while the system software is booting up.

Position the Tube


This section describes how to setup and position mechanical components of the Definium AMX 700.
Steps for mechanical positioning are organized in the following way.
• Adjustment of column and telescoping arm
• Rotation of x-ray tube unit, and
• Adjustment of collimator

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Mechanical Setup
Follow these steps to release the latch, vertical column and telescoping arm locks from the park/
transport position.
Make sure that the unit is turned ON.

Latch Lock Release


1. Grip the collimator handles to activate the switch. (You should hear a clicking sound.) With slight
force, push the telescoping arm down to release latch and then raise up.
Š Note that you only need to grip one of the collimator handles (Figure 4-7) to activate the lock
release system.
NOTE: Unlatching the tube will activate the monitor. The monitor turns off when the tube is latched to
conserve battery power.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 4-5
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4: Moving and Positioning

Figure 4-7 Lock release mechanism

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Adjust Column and Telescoping Arm
In the following steps you can free the Definium AMX 700 components for positioning in one of two ways:
by gripping the collimator handle(s) to keep the lock system released or, whenever necessary, overriding
the lock system with slight force.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


When possible, we recommend that you use the lock release system.
IMPORTANT!: Remove the tether from the holder before rotating the column.
1. Rotate the arm and vertical column assembly to horizontally position the telescoping arm. The
vertical column can be rotated 270 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise (detent at 0 degree park
location). See Figure 4-8.
2. Raise the arm on the vertical column to the desired height.
3. Extend the retractable arm to the desired length and release. See Figure 4-8.
Figure 4-8 Extending the retractable arm

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 4-6
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4: Moving and Positioning

Rotate the Tube


Because the tube assembly is counterbalanced, no active lock is required. And little effort is needed to

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
override friction and rotate the tube.
1. Use the collimator handles to position the tube to the desired angle.
Š You may rotate the tube in two directions:
– clockwise and counterclockwise +180 degrees (detents at every 90 degrees), or
– backwards -10 degrees and forwards +100 degrees (detent at 0 degree). See Figure 4-9.
Figure 4-9 Tube rotation
1. Collimator rotation knob
2. X-ray tube
3. Retractable arm
4. 110° (Forward)
5. -10° (Backward)
6. 0° Detent

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Adjust the Collimator
The Definium AMX 700 manual collimator limits patient radiation exposure to a desired area at a given
distance from the x-ray tube focal spot.
1. Press the field light button (on either the collimator face or hand switch) to activate the high-intensity
field lamp. The cross-hair beam shows the field center
Š The field light is timed and automatically turns off 30 seconds after you release the switch. To
adjust the field light timer, contact your service representative.
Š To activate the field light for another 30 seconds, press the button again when the light goes out.
(You may keep the field light on for up to 4 minutes. After 4 minutes, the field light will turn off for
cooling and remain inactive for 5 minutes.)
Š You may take an exposure while the field light is on; the light will automatically turn off when an
exposure is taken.
2. Position the collimator and tube using the field light and cross-hair as guides. The cross-hair shows
the field center. For fine positioning of the collimator, see Step 5.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 4-7
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4: Moving and Positioning

3. Use the tape measure on the side of the collimator to measure the SID (source-to-image distance).
4. Collimate by adjusting the size of the field with the two control knobs located on the front of the

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
collimator (Figure 4-10).
Š For fine positioning of the collimator, see Step 5.
Š The left knob controls the transverse dimension of the blades. A diagram on the face of the
collimator shows which knob controls which dimension (Figure 4-10).
Š Field size from 0x0 inches and up to 17x17 inches (43x43 cm) at the 40 inch (102 cm) SID can be
obtained. The knob selectors indicate the field size for a selected SID.
Š Dial numbers on the calibrated scale are for a 40 inch (100 cm) and 72 inch (180 cm) scale SIDs.
Figure 4-10 Collimator controls

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


5. You may rotate the collimator about its vertical axis (that is, to the right or left) in two ways: by a
simple 90° detent method or by a manual lock method for an angle other than 90°.
Š 90-degree detent method: Pull out the knob (Figure 4-11) and rotate the collimator to the desired
90° detent position. The detent will snap in place and lock.
Š Manual lock method: Pull out the knob, position the collimator to the desired angle (other than 90°
detent), and turn the knob clockwise to secure. (Turn the knob counterclockwise to unlock the
collimator and reposition.)
Figure 4-11 Collimator rotation knob

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 4-8
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 5: Taking Exposures

Chapter 5: Taking Exposures

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
This chapter describes the procedures for working with the Definium AMX 700 unit hardware when
acquiring images. Refer to Appendix A: GE Portable DR Detector Operating Instructions-Chapter A4:
Image Acquisition for more information about the system software used to acquire, view, and manage
images.
Topics covered include:
• Taking Exposures (p. 5-1)
• Technique Adjustment (p. 5-2)

Taking Exposures
Check the battery status and message displays for battery condition. In general, make sure that the unit
battery is at more than half capacity before starting a shift.
It is important to note that you do not have to raise your kVp or mAs value to compensate for low battery
capacity.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


1. Position the unit and x-ray tube.
2. Position the patient and the detector.
3. Shield and collimate as appropriate.
4. Select the procedure from the Worklist. Refer to Appendix A: GE Portable DR Detector Operating
Instructions-Chapter A3: Worklist for more information.
5. Select the anatomy and exam to perform. Refer to Appendix A: GE Portable DR Detector Operating
Instructions-Chapter A4: Image Acquisition for more information.
Š The default technique selection will appear on the Acquisition screen and unit display panel.
6. Select the Patient Size.
7. Adjust the technique as appropriate.
Š The values displayed on the Acquisition screen and display panel will synchronize.
8. PREP with the hand switch or TechSwitch. Accelerating the rotor to proper speed takes about 3
seconds.
Š READY FOR X-RAY will appear on the message display.
NOTE: You may, if you wish, press the button all the way down to take an exposure. The 3 second prep
cycle is automatic. (If PREP/EXPOSE positions are pressed simultaneously, READY FOR X-RAY will
not display.)

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 5-1
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 5: Taking Exposures

9. Press the PREP/EXPOSE button all the way down to take an exposure. (An audible tone will sound, and
the X-RAY indicator will light up.)

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Š If an exposure isn’t taken within 10 seconds of pressing PREP, release and repeat the prep cycle.
(Release the PREP/EXPOSE button, and press to prep position again.)
Š If the message WAIT appears, you may still take another exposure. Although, because of
insufficient recovery time, the selected technique may be inaccurate. (Refer to Chapter 8:
Messages on Display for a complete description of all x-ray messages.)
Š HEAT WAIT displays when the tube anode is cooling. No exposures can be taken while this
message appears. (The length of the delay will vary with the selected technique.) If an exposure is
attempted while HEAT WAIT is active X-RAY DISABLED will be displayed.
Š The kVp/mAs Numeric Display will flash for about 6 seconds after the release of the hand switch
from the PREP position, if an exposure has occurred.
10. Secure the unit for transport when the exam is complete.
11. Park tube and detector.

Technique Adjustment

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


The software provided with the GE Portable DR Detector contains the recommended default technique
settings for both digital and cassette exams. Technique adjustment should always be made on the
Acquisition screen. Refer to Appendix A: GE Portable DR Detector Operating Instructions-Chapter A4:
Image Acquisition for more information.
The mAs and kVp adjustment buttons provided on the display panel should only be used if the unit
software fails. The following information is provided for reference if the software fails and techniques
must be adjusted manually.
IMPORTANT!: If the software fails, the digital detector cannot be used; exams must be taken with either
an analog or CR cassette.
When in acquisition mode, the display panel also shows the kVp and mAs values (Figure 5-1). Changing
the values on the control panel automatically updates the values on the Acquisition screen and vice
versa.
Figure 5-1 kVp and mAs display on unit and Acquisition screen

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 5-2
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 5: Taking Exposures

Use the kV and mAs fields on the Acquisition screen or the up and down arrow buttons on the control

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
panel (Figure 5-2) to adjust the parameters for a patient exam.
Figure 5-2 Technique adjustment buttons

1. To increase the kVp, press the UP kVp arrow. To decrease the kVp value, press the DOWN kVp arrow.
See Figure 5-2.
2. To increase the mAs, press the UP mAs arrow. Press the DOWN mAs arrow to decrease the value.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Š Should you reach a maximum or minimum value, kVp / mAs MAX or kVp / mAs MIN will briefly
appear on the message display to alert you.
IMPORTANT!: Carefully check the digital display (Figure 5-1) before making an exposure to ensure that
the factors selected are those that are intended. Pay particular attention to the placement
of the decimal point in the mAs setting to ensure that whole numbers are not mistaken
for an intended mAs fractional number.
Š The kVp ranges from 50 to 125 kVp, in 24 steps:
– 50, 52, 54, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 66, 68, 70, 72, 74, 76, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 105, 110, 115, 120 and
125.
Š The mAs ranges from 0.40 to 320 mAs, in 30 steps:
– 0.4, 0.5, 0.64, 0.8, 1, 1.25, 1.6, 2, 2.5, 3.2, 4, 5, 6.40, 8, 10, 12.5, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 64, 80, 100,
125, 160, 200, 250 and 320. Refer to Table 5-1 for maximum technique ratings.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 5-3
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 5: Taking Exposures

Table 5-1 Maximum kVp and mAs Ratings

kVp mAs

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
110 to 125 200

95 to 105 250

50 to 90 320

Š It is important to note that the kVp setting takes precedence over your mAs setting. That is, if your
technique would generate too much heat for the x-ray tube anode, the mAs setting will
automatically decrease to permit the selected kVp.
– For instance, if kVp is set at 110 then your maximum mAs will not exceed 200.
NOTE: The maximum allowable kVp and mAs ratings stated within this operation manual and as allowed
by the equipment, may appear to exceed the tube ratings. The reason for this apparent
discrepancy is that the tube rating charts in Product Data Sheet 2236721-100 are based upon a
25% heated tube assembly (75% heat units remaining), while the actual maximum allowable kVp
and mAs ratings are based upon a cold tube assembly. The Definium AMX 700 generator contains
a proprietary heat loading algorithm which protects the tube assembly for all heat loading

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


conditions.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 5-4
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6: Charging the Batteries

Chapter 6: Charging the Batteries

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Topics covered include:
• Overview (p. 6-1)
• Standby Mode (p. 6-2)
• Recharge Recommended (p. 6-3)
• Battery Drain (p. 6-3)
• Application Tip (p. 6-4)
• How to Re-Charge Batteries (p. 6-4)
• Main Power Circuit Breaker (p. 6-6)

Overview
Battery charging is as easy as driving the Definium AMX 700 to a correctly rated wall outlet and plugging
the unit in. Ratings are as follows:

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Table 6-1 Wall socket rating by model number

Models Rating

5151481-3 110/125 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz @ 5A


5151481-4

The time required to fully recharge the Definium AMX 700 batteries will vary according to battery charge
level as indicated on the battery status display.
During recharge the Definium AMX 700 capacity gauge increases as the unit is charged. To recharge
from 10% to 100% typically requires 4-5 hours.
Occasionally the Definium AMX 700 automatically performs an extended charge to make sure that all
portions of the battery’s internal plates get fully charged. This extended charge occurs every tenth 10th)
time the battery is charged.
To recharge from 10% to 100% during an extended charge typically requires 10 hours. The Definium AMX
700 will continue to attempt extended charges until at least half of the extended charge time is
complete.
NOTE: The extended charge will be transparent to the operator. The only indication that it is in progress
is the longer charge time.
Although portable application will vary site to site, under most operating conditions, a fully charged
Definium AMX 700 is designed to supply enough charge for 2 hours of use.
The Definium AMX 700 capacity gauge visually displays the remaining capacity using a 48 segment bar
graph display.
At or near full charge, all segments are illuminated (Figure 6-1).

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 6-1
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6: Charging the Batteries

The blue battery status display approximates remaining battery charge, and should only be used to
determine the relative state of charge.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Figure 6-1 Charging display
Charging Full charge

Capacity Gauge Features


“Stuck at Full” Feature
After the Definium AMX 700 charges to 100% (i.e. “CHARGE COMPLETE”), the capacity gauge will remain
“stuck-at-full” for a pre-programmed amount of usage before the number of lit segments begins to
decrease. This usage is equivalent to approximately 10 minutes of drive or 25 minutes of idle. Once this

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


“stuck-at-full” capacity is used, the capacity gauge will update according to Table 6-2.
Emergency Capacity Feature
When the Definium AMX 700 capacity gauge drops to 0%, inhibiting x-ray exposures, it is possible to
access some emergency capacity to finish an exam by turning the Definium AMX 700 off and then back
on. After it has completed its power-up tests, the Definium AMX 700 will provide enough capacity for
approximately 45 seconds of usage before x-ray exposures are again inhibited.

CAUTION: In some cases the Definium AMX 700 battery may not provide sufficient voltage for proper
operation when EMERGENCY CAPACITY is used. Therefore this feature should only be used
when absolutely necessary.

Standby Mode
Having the key switch ON while charging will result in standby mode. Drive and exposures are not
allowed, but the PC and monitor can be used. The unit will remain in standby mode for a maximum of 60
minutes. There will be a timer countdown in the display area showing the remaining time before the PC
and monitor will be turned off. After the PC and monitor is turned off, the display will show “TURN OFF
SWITCH”.
It is highly recommended to always turn the unit off while charging.
NOTE: The unit will not fully charge in the normal 4-5 hours if kept in standby mode.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 6-2
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6: Charging the Batteries

Recharge Recommended
When battery charge dips below approximately 10%, recharge is recommended.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
As the Definium AMX 700 is used in its various modes of operation, the number of segments lit will slowly
decrease.
It’s important to note that you do not have to raise your kVp and mAs value to compensate for low
battery capacity.
To ensure maximum battery life, the Definium AMX 700 should not be recharged until at least one-half of
the bar graph segments have extinguished.

Battery Drain
Figure 6-2 shows how much of the battery capacity is used for the various Definium AMX 700 operating
modes in a relative basis.
Figure 6-2 Battery drain
71%

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


17%
8%
2% 2%

Drive Idle Field X-ray X-ray


Light Prep Generation
As Figure 6-2 demonstrates, the majority of the battery pack’s capacity is used for drive and idle. Thus,
reducing the amount of drive time by parking the Definium AMX 700 in a central location and turning the
system OFF when not in use will make more capacity available for x-ray generation and will increase the
service life of the batteries.

Bar Graph Display vs. Battery Loading


Table 6-2 details the various battery loads and how they affect the bar graph display.
Table 6-2 Battery loads

Load mode Approximate discharge rate Typical daily usage*

Drive (Drive handle engaged) 0.45 segments/minute 30 segments

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 6-3
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6: Charging the Batteries

Load mode Approximate discharge rate Typical daily usage*

Idle (Definium AMX 700 on but 0.14 segments/minute 7 segments

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
not in use)

Field Light (Any time light is ON) 0.39 segments/minute 4 segments

X-Ray Prep (PREP switch 0.45 segments/minute 1 segment


depressed)

X-Ray (High voltage generation) 0.0005 to 0.8 segments/ <1 segment


exposure

TOTAL DAILY SEGMENTS TURNED OFF: 43 segments (90%)

* Typical daily usage is based on historical data from AMX4+ sites and estimated Definium AMX 700
usage for typical mobile radiography procedures. Note that actual loading will vary from site to site
depending on usage.

Application Tip

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


To insure the greatest reliability, you may decide to establish a battery charging schedule at your
particular site, based on past experience and anticipated needs.

How to Re-Charge Batteries


Follow these steps to recharge the batteries.

CAUTION: When recharging the batteries, always locate the unit in a well ventilated area.
1. Drive the Definium AMX 700 to a designated battery charging station or to a correctly rated wall
outlet. Position the unit to within 10 feet of the outlet.
2. To plug in, firmly grip the plug located on the front of the unit (Figure 6-3), and pull the retractable
cord straight out until it is fully extended. Set the cord by a slow pull-release action. Plug into the
battery charging station.
Figure 6-3 Battery charging cord

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 6-4
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6: Charging the Batteries

3. Check the message display to confirm the charging status: the message CHARGING should appear
on the display (Figure 6-4).

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Š The message “STANDBY XX MINS” will appear if the Key Switch is ON. Refer to Standby Mode (p. 6-
2) for more information.
Figure 6-4 Charging display

Š During normal charging all other controls—driving and x-ray exposures, for instance—are
disabled. Note that you may charge the batteries with the Key Switch in either the ON or OFF
position.
Š During STANDBY (refer to Standby Mode (p. 6-2) for more information), the unit may not be driven
nor may x-ray exposures be taken. If the Key Switch is in the ON position and the display shows
STANDBY, the system software may be used to update Worklist data, view and adjust images
stored in the local database, manage images, or edit preferences. Normal QAP tests cannot be
performed. The unit will remain in standby mode for a maximum of 60 minutes.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


4. When CHARGE COMPLETE appears on the message display, and all blue segments are illuminated,
the batteries are fully charged (at 100% of capacity).
Š Charging should not be stopped before the CHARGE COMPLETE message appears, even if all of the
indicator bars are illuminated.
5. Unplug the unit from the outlet, giving the plug a slight tug to release from take-up reel.
IMPORTANT!: After unplugging the unit, turn the unit on and wait approximately 15 minutes before
taking your first exposure to ensure technique accuracy.
Š If the unit is plugged into the AC wall outlet for an extended period after the “Charge Complete”
message is displayed, the unit will shutdown by tripping the main circuit breaker to protect the
internal electronics. This same protection scheme can cause the main circuit breaker to trip if the
Definium AMX 700 is turned on while still plugged into the AC wall outlet after the “Charge
Complete” message is displayed (there may be a delay of 30 - 180 seconds after the unit is turned
on before the breaker will trip). Refer to Main Power Circuit Breaker (p. 6-6) for more information.
IMPORTANT!: The unit should be unplugged when the “Charge Complete” state is reached. Also, the Key
Switch should not be turned ON while the unit is plugged into the AC wall outlet while the
“Charge Complete” message is displayed.
Š The prompt BATTERY TOO HIGH may display when the first exposure is attempted after charging.
If this occurs, run the rotor for 15 to 20 seconds and then make the exposure. This prompt is
caused by a normal battery voltage rise after charging.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 6-5
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6: Charging the Batteries

Main Power Circuit Breaker


The main power circuit breaker is located on the front right side of the unit (Figure 6-5).

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Figure 6-5 Main power circuit breaker
1. ON position
2. OFF position
3. Trip lever

Main
power
circuit
breaker

If the battery charge is too low, or in the event of an overload in the high-voltage system, the circuit
breaker will trip (interrupt power to the x-ray unit).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Should the circuit breaker trip, the control panel lights will go out and you will be pre vented from
operating the unit. To resume operation, flip the circuit breaker up to the ON position. If necessary,
recharge the unit or (if the battery is adequately charged) try the procedure again.
If the battery is within operating condition (as indicated by the battery status and message displays) and
power interruptions are frequent, there may be a fault in the high voltage system. If a fault is indicated,
have the unit checked by a qualified service representative.
If the unit does not turn off when the key switch is turned off, isolate the unit to prevent unauthorized
operation, use the circuit breaker to remove power from the unit, and have the unit checked by a
qualified service representative.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 6-6
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 7: Maintenance and Service

Chapter 7: Maintenance and Service

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Topics covered include:
• Cleaning the Unit (p. 7-1)
• Periodic Maintenance by Service Personnel (p. 7-1)
– Qualified Service Available (p. 7-2)
– Maintenance Schedule (p. 7-2)

Cleaning the Unit


We recommend that you clean the Definium AMX 700 regularly with a soft cloth and a mild, non-abrasive
cleaner. Apply the cleaner to the cloth, not directly to the unit, to safe-guard against damage to the
circuitry. If a corrosive chemical is spilled or splashed on the unit surface, be sure to clean it off
immediately.
The following chemicals and products have been tested and approved by GE for cleaning the Definium
AMX 700 and GE Portable DR Detector.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


• Cidex OPA
• Gigasept FF
• T-Spray
• Inciden Plus
• Perasafe
• Ster-Bac Blue
• Super Sani-Cloth Germicidal Wipes
• TriGene
• Isopropyl Alcohol (70% maximum solution)
• Bleach (50% solution)
Refer to Chapter A1: Detector Overview-Cleaning (p. A1-10) for more information about cleaning the GE
Portable DR Detector and its accessories.

Periodic Maintenance by Service Personnel


To insure the continued safe performance of your Definium AMX 700 portable x-ray unit, establish a
periodic maintenance program with a qualified service representative.
Periodic maintenance checks are required thirteen months after installation and every year thereafter. A
periodic maintenance schedule and a sample mAs or kVp accuracy chart are provided on the following
pages.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 7-1
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 7: Maintenance and Service

Qualified Service Available


GE Healthcare and its associates maintain a worldwide organization of service personnel specially

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
trained on medical x-ray equipment. Consult your GE representative to find out more about all the
available service programs.

Maintenance Schedule
Table 7-1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance/Checks Frequency

Replace counterweight Every 5 years


cable

Inspect counterweight cable Every year (Refer to Service Documentation CD-ROM 5161519-200.)

Verify no movement Every 12 months, verify that there is no movement between the
between collimator and tube collimator and X-ray tube. If any movement is detected, you MUST
unit remove the collimator and inspect all related fasteners. Refer to
Service Documentation CD-ROM 5161519-200 for additional
information.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Extension arm inspection Every year (Refer to Service Documentation CD-ROM 5161519-200.)

Collimator general Every year (Refer to Service Documentation CD-ROM 5161519-200.)


inspection and adjustment

Filament and rotor interlocks Every year (Refer to Service Documentation CD-ROM 5161519-200.)

X-ray tube anode rotation Every year (Refer to Service Documentation CD-ROM 5161519-200.)

Column and carriage Every year (Refer to Service Documentation CD-ROM 5161519-200.)
assembly inspection

mAs accuracy Every year (Refer to Service Documentation CD-ROM 5161519-200.)

kVp accuracy Every year (Refer to Service Documentation CD-ROM 5161519-200.)

Operator displays Every year (Refer to Service Documentation CD-ROM 5161519-200.)

Cross hair Every year (Refer to Service Documentation CD-ROM 5161519-200.)

Collimator alignment Every year (Refer to Service Documentation CD-ROM 5161519-200.)

Field size indicator Every year (Refer to Service Documentation CD-ROM 5161519-200.)

Rotational detent Every year (Refer to Service Documentation CD-ROM 5161519-200.)

Verify all cable ties are tight Every year (Refer to Service Documentation CD-ROM 5161519-200.)
and secure

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 7-2
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 7: Maintenance and Service

Maintenance/Checks Frequency

Check that Detector Power Every year (Refer to Service Documentation CD-ROM 5161519-200.)

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Supply cables and cable
retention clips are securely
in place

Exposure tone is audible and Every year (Refer to Service Documentation CD-ROM 5161519-200.)
x-ray on indicators light up
when hand switch
depressed to expose
position

Auxiliary items (battery Every year (Refer to GE Portable DR Detector PM Schedule.)


charger, HV cables, etc.)

Detector calibration Every year (Refer to GE Portable DR Detector PM Schedule.)

Visual inspection of detector, Every year (Refer to GE Portable DR Detector PM Schedule.)


tether and grid for damage,
wear, etc.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Inspect PC shock mounts for Every year (Refer to GE Portable DR Detector PM Schedule.)
damage/wear

Verify the PC is still mounted Every year (Refer to GE Portable DR Detector PM Schedule.)
securely.

Inspect monitor for damage/ Every year (Refer to GE Portable DR Detector PM Schedule.)
wear

Check that the monitor is Every year (Refer to GE Portable DR Detector PM Schedule.)
tightly bolted to the top
cover.

Monitor calibration Every year (Refer to GE Portable DR Detector PM Schedule.)

Touch screen calibration Every year (Refer to GE Portable DR Detector PM Schedule.)

Equipment and Serial


Number:

Date of Inspection:

Maintenance Check
Performed By:

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 7-3
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 7: Maintenance and Service

Table 7-2 Sample chart for technique accuracy tests

Technique Selected

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
mAs kVp Primary Volts kVp Time (Sec.)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 7-4
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 8: Messages on Display

Chapter 8: Messages on Display

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Two kinds of messages can appear on the message display on the control cover: status messages and
error messages.
Status messages simply inform you of the operating condition of the Definium AMX 700, and look
something like this.
Figure 8-1 Ready message

Another type of message, called an error message, may appear should a problem occur with the
equipment. An error message looks something like this.
Figure 8-2 Error message

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Note that an error message includes an alphanumeric code, and will display one line at a time.
If an error message appears, follow these steps.
1. Try the function again. If the problem is corrected, and no error message is displayed, proceed as
usual.
2. If the error message still displays, turn the unit OFF then back ON.
Š Diagnostics or self-tests are quickly performed when the unit is turned back on.
Š When diagnostics are complete, the following message displays:
ERROR XXX
OCCURRED WHEN
THE UNIT WAS
LAST OPERATED –
PROCEED WITH
---CAUTION –
3. Now try the function once more. If the problem is corrected, and no error message is displayed,
proceed as usual.
4. If the problem persists, call your service representative, and report the code and message shown on
the display. This will prepare service for the type of problem encountered and the service required.
Table 8-1 lists the status messages and provides a brief explanation of each one.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 8-1
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 8: Messages on Display

Table 8-1 Status message descriptions

Status Messages Description

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
AUTO CAL LIMIT If this message displays, the unit is at its automatic calibration limit. A service
call is recommended to ensure accurate technique and radiographic results.
Exposures are not inhibited.

BATTERY TOO HIGH This message may appear when attempting to take a high technique
VOLTAGE RECOVERY exposure immediately after removing the unit from charge. Exposure is
IS REQUIRED prevented. Operating the field lamp or driving theDefinium AMX 700 will
assist in stabilizing the battery voltage so that the exposure may be made.

BATTERY TOO LOW This message may appear when attempting to expose when only a few
segments remain on the battery charge indicator. This means that the battery
does not contain sufficient charge to make an exposure.

CHARGE REQUIRED Exposure is prevented. Recharging the batteries will eliminate the message
and allow exposures.

CHARGE COMPLETE The charge process is complete, and the battery is fully recharged.

STANDBY The unit is allowing usage for a maximum of 60 minutes (keyswitch is ON and

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


the unit is plugged in).

CHARGING The unit is charging.

DRIVES ONLY All modes are disabled except drive. Service is required.

HEAT WAIT No exposures can be taken while this message appears (The length of the
delay will vary with the selected technique). This message displays while the
tube anode is cooling.

kVp MAX Displayed on the alphanumeric display any time an attempt is made to
increase the kVp above125.

kVp MIN Displayed on the alphanumeric display any time an attempt is made to
decrease the kVp below 50.

LIGHT DISABLED If the field light is on for over 4 minutes, the light will be automatically turned
FOR COOLING off to prevent the collimator from overheating. You may activate the field
light in about 5 minutes.

mAs MAX Displayed on the alphanumeric display any time an attempt is made to
increase the mAs above320 or above the acceptable energy limit for the x-
ray tube anode. The acceptable heat limit is based on the kVp you selected.
Note that the kVp setting will always take precedence over the mAs setting.
That is, if the technique selected would generate too much x-ray tube heat,
the maximum mAs will automatically decrease to permit the selected kVp.

mAs MIN Displayed on the alphanumeric display any time an attempt is made to
decrease the mAs below 0.40.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 8-2
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 8: Messages on Display

Status Messages Description

READY FOR X-RAY The prep cycle has successfully completed, and an exposure may be taken

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
within the next 30 seconds. (If an exposure is attempted after 30 seconds, the
prep cycle must be repeated.)

RECHARGE The estimated usable battery capacity is near 0%. No more exposures may
IMMEDIATELY X-RAY be taken. Although charge is too low to complete an x-ray exam, you’ll have
INHIBITED enough energy to drive the unit to a correctly rated wall outlet for recharge.

RECHARGE The remaining battery capacity is approximately 10% or less.


RECOMMENDED

RELEASE HANDLE The Definium AMX 700 was moving faster than the drive motors allow.
Release the Drive Handle to clear the message, and then continue with
normal operation. This may happen if you push the Definium AMX 700 too
hard when driving down a ramp.

RELEASE PREP SW The prep switch is still depressed (five seconds after an exposure or beyond
the 30-second timeout). If taking an exposure, repeat the prep cycle: 1)
release the prep switch, and 2) when the message WAIT is no longer
displayed, press to prep position again.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


RESET AEC CNTROL Reset the AEC controller. AEC is on, but not enabled. For Example: The (ON)
light is flashing on the Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) unit. This indicates
the paddle is not connected. Reset the AEC controller. The red reset (GEN) on
the Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) unit is lit. This indicates the back-up
time is too short. Reset the AEC controller.

REVERSE ONLY Forward drive is prevented because the safety bumper is in contact with
another object. Reverse the unit before proceeding.

TESTING COMPLETE Power-up diagnostic testing is finished.

WAIT Wait before taking another exposure. (Displayed when the tube anode has
cooled, but before the battery has recovered from the previous exposure.)
Although radiographs can be taken, because of low battery voltage they may
not achieve the desired kVp technique accuracy.

WAIT/ACT-XX.X After an AEC exposure the XX.X field will display the actual exposure mAs.

X-RAY DISABLED This message appears if an attempt to make an exposure occurs while
HEATWAIT is displayed.

X-RAY TUBE PARKED No exposures can be taken with the x-ray tube in the park/transport position.

DETECTOR PARKED Detector is in the holder. Exposures are inhibited

DIGITAL MODE System Software is ready for Digital Radiography procedures

FILM MODE ONLY System can only be used for film procedures

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 8-3
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 8: Messages on Display

Status Messages Description

NO DIG, FILM ONLY System malfunction and can only be used for film procedures

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
WAIT FOR DIGITAL System software is being loaded. Wait for system to boot completely.

SHUTTING DOWN System PC is shutting down

GOOD-BYE System PC has shut down

NO DIG RESPONSE Digital Radiography components are not responding.

TURN OFF SWITCH System PC has shut down. Turn Off the unit using the Key Switch

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) 8-4
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Appendix A: GE Portable DR Detector Operating Instructions

Appendix A: GE Portable DR Detector


Operating Instructions

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
This appendix details all the software that is provided with the GE Portable DR Detector used with the
Definium AMX 700.

Topics covered in this appendix include:


• Chapter A1: Detector Overview describes the detector functions, handling, and use.
• Chapter A2: General Information describes features and functions that apply to the whole detector
and detector software.
• Chapter A3: Worklist describes the process of adding procedures to and selecting procedures from
the Worklist screen to begin exams.
• Chapter A4: Image Acquisition describes the process of performing exams.
• Chapter A5: Image Viewer describes the features and functions for adjusting and viewing acquired
images.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


• Chapter A6: Image Management describes the features and functions to find and organize acquired
images and exams.
• Chapter A7: Set Preferences describes the features and processes to configure the detector software.
• Chapter A8: Quality Assurance Process and Maintenance describes the process to conduct checks on
the detector for continued image quality.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A-1
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A1: Detector Overview

Chapter A1: Detector Overview

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
This section outlines the basic detector functions, usage, care, and specifications.
Topics covered include:
• Detector Functions (p. A1-2)
• Description (p. A1-2)
– Panel (p. A1-3)
– Electronics (p. A1-3)
– Physical Appearance / Finish (p. A1-3)
– Nameplates and Markings (p. A1-3)
– Detector Safety Labels (p. A1-4)
• Use (p. A1-5)
– Detector Alignment (p. A1-5)
– Indicator LEDs (p. A1-5)
– Electro-magnetic Interference (p. A1-6)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


• Detector Grid (p. A1-7)
– Grid Attachment (p. A1-7)
• Handling and Cleaning (p. A1-8)
– Detector Handling (p. A1-8)
– Tether Handling (p. A1-9)
– Grid Handling (p. A1-9)
– Cleaning (p. A1-10)
• Specifications (p. A1-11)
– Detector Size and Weight (p. A1-11)
– Environmental Constraints (p. A1-11)

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A1-1
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A1: Detector Overview

Detector Functions
Detector primary functions are:

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
• To convert x-ray data into digital image data
• To transfer the digital data to an external workstation for processing and display

Description
The detector is an x-ray imaging device. It consists of an array of 2022 x 2022 pixels (40.4 x 40.4 cm).
Each pixel is attached to a data acquisition circuit that converts incoming x-ray signal to 14-bit digital
data.
The detector is constructed from a metal case. The front face contains a graphite x-ray imaging window.
The back face contains the usage instructions and safety warnings.
Figure A1-1 shows the front of the detector, which faces toward the x-ray source.
Figure A1-1 Detector front
1. LED indicator lights
2. Handle

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


3. Tether
4. Detection area (inside white marker lines)

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A1-2
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A1: Detector Overview

Figure A1-2 Detector operation diagram

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
Panel
The panel consists of a thin-film amorphous silicon integrated circuit on a glass substrate with a cesium
iodide scintillator. The scintillating material absorbs the x-rays and converts the energy to light. The light
is converted into a charge that is digitized by the detector electronics.

Electronics
The primary function of the readout electronics is to convert the charge into digital image data. This data
is then transmitted to the system workstation through an ethernet connection.

Physical Appearance / Finish


The detector unit is designed to be installable as 1) an external patient access/contact surface and 2) a
non-external patient access/contact surface.
Detector surfaces have been treated with a finish to allow a smooth and easily cleanable surface. Care
shall be taken to protect the surface from scratches.

Nameplates and Markings


A label on the back of the detector contains the GE part number.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A1-3
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A1: Detector Overview

Detector Safety Labels


The back of the GE Portable DR Detector displays the following symbols and information:

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Figure A1-3 Labels on back of detector
1. Attention, consult CAUTION: Do Not Drop.
accompanying
CAUTION: Device weighs 5.89kg
documents.
(13 lbs).
CAUTION: Do Not Use a
defibrillator while patient
remains in contact with
detector.

2.Type B Applied Part

3. Maximum load

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


CAUTION: Maximum load is 160
kg (350 lbs).

4. Operating
temperature
CAUTION: Operate and store the
detector within the temperature
range of 0 – 50º C (32 -122°F).

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A1-4
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A1: Detector Overview

Use

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Detector Alignment
To aid in proper alignment of the detector with respect to the X-ray source, there are alignment marks
centered on the front side (imaging side) of the detector. The arrow represents the default heads-up
display orientation.

Indicator LEDs
Two LEDs have been provided for indication of the detector status.
• The red LED lights up when the detector patient contact temperature is below 0°C (32°F) or if the
temperature exceeds 50ºC (122°F).
• The green LED lights up when the detector is powered, and has performed at least 4 scrubs. This LED
indicates “Ready to Image” status.
Table A1-1 shows a list of conditions and how they are communicated by the LED lights.
Table A1-1 Detector status lights

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Condition Green LED Red LED Indication

Detector Off Off Off Off Off Detector Off or No Power

Idle Mode 50% 1s Off Off Idle Mode

Ready to Image 100% - Off Off Ready for X-ray

Temperature Warning - - 50% 1s Contact Temp exceed


warning

Temperature Error - - 100% - Contact Temp exceed safe


level

Diagnostic Failure Off Off 50% 2s Failure in BIST

Timeout Error Off Off 50% .5s No power mode command


in time

Diagnostic Running 75% 1s Off Off Test Running

Image Transfer 50% .1s Off Off Active data transfer

Lost Communication 50% 1s 50% 1s No communication with the


system

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A1-5
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A1: Detector Overview

Electro-magnetic Interference
The detector has been designed and tested to meet all IEC regulations in regard to electro-magnetic (EM)

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
susceptibility (and EMC).
However, there are no regulations for low frequency EM fields. All flat panel detectors have some
susceptibility to these EM fields.
This detector is robust to EM fields up to 0.1mG over a broad low frequency range (DC - 250kHz).
It has been found that some common equipment in clinical environments can generate EM fields well
over 0.1mG. Some measurements have shown 4mG field strengths which can cause artifacts on x-ray
images.
EM fields are reduced by the square of the distance between the EM source and the detector. Thus,
moving the EM source twice as far away will reduce the field strength by 4 times.

General suggestions:
• Keep IV pumps, patient monitoring, feeding pumps 1 meter or more away from any detector surface.
• Consider turning off equipment that cannot be moved.
• Change the patient or detector orientation /position to maximize distance from any equipment.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Possible sources of EM fields:
• IV pumps
• Monitors
• Feeding pumps
• Patient monitors
• ECG equipment
• EMG equipment
• Infusion pumps
• RF ablators
• Powered surgical equipment
• Heaters
• Air conditioners
• Refrigerators

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A1-6
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A1: Detector Overview

Detector Grid
The GE Portable DR Detector grid is integrated with a holder that fits the detector exactly. The grid fits

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
over the detector handle and has raised edges to fit around the detector. Once together, you may handle
the grid and detector as one unit.
The arrows on the grid surface show the direction of the grid lines. As shown in Figure A1-4, they grid
lines run horizontally.
Figure A1-4 Grid

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Place the grid over the detector so that the detector LED lights show through the holes in the grid holder.

Grid Attachment
The bottom edge of the detector should be placed into the bottom lip of the grid holder while held in the
vertical position with the carbon graphite cover (on the front of the detector) facing the inside of the grid
holder. Then press the detector into the top edge of the grid holder. Be careful to not pinch your fingers or
clothing when assembling.
While in use, keep a firm grasp on both the grid holder and the detector. The markings for the active area
are clearly shown on the exterior surface of the grid holder.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A1-7
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A1: Detector Overview

Handling and Cleaning

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Detector Handling
The device contains sensitive electronics that are susceptible to vibration, shock, drop, and impact.
When handling the device, use the handle and/or use both hands to manipulate the detector into the
correct anatomical position for the exam.

WARNING: Do not swing the device into hard surfaces, especially corners, as this may scratch the
cover, create an image quality artifacts, or damage the electronics inside.
Special Instructions if the detector is dropped: Inspect the exterior for any possible cracks. Run
Detector Check to test the detector (refer to Chapter A8: Quality Assurance Process and Maintenance). It
will be clear if the electronics are not functioning. Other possible failures may include communication
problems, image quality degradation, and loss of power. If any or all of these occur, call your GE Service
Representative.
• Do not drop objects onto the detector.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


• Do not use the detector as a stretcher to lift a patient.
• Do not drop the detector at any time.
• Do not prop the device on an edge, against wall or bed. Keep detector in cradle, bucky, or other GE-
supplied container.
• Do not place other objects or patients on the detector if it is not on a flat surface, as shown in
Figure A1-5.
• Do not use unapproved chemical cleaners.
• Do not immerse detector into water or other liquids.
• Do not use a defibrillator while patient remains in contact with detector.
Figure A1-5 Detector handling - do not place objects on detector if it is not lying flat

Detector surfaces have been treated with a finish to provide a smooth and easily cleanable surface. Take
care to protect the surface from scratches.

WARNING: Extra precautions should be taken if the device will be exposed to excessive amounts of
bodily fluids or liquids.
The detector is designed to prevent some liquids or particulate matter from getting inside the cover. It
can sustain a temporary splash or spray, but it is not designed to be immersed in liquid (not even
temporarily).

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A1-8
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A1: Detector Overview

Tether Handling
The tether connects the detector to the system. Damage to the tether means that the detector cannot

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
send image data to the unit.
To ensure maximum tether life, follow these guidelines:
• Treat the tether with care.
• Clean the tether regular with an approved chemical. Refer to Cleaning (p. A1-10) for more
information.
• Untwist the tether periodically. The colored stripe on the tether shows if it is twisted.
• Do not jerk or pull on the tether. For example, do not pull on the tether to free it from under a wheel
(especially if the tether is twisted).
• Do not step on the tether.
• Do not run over the tether with the unit, cart, table or other equipment.
• Do not use the tether as a handle.
• Do not bend or fold the tether sharply, especially at the points where the tether connects to the
detector and to the unit.

Grid Handling

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


The grid is a sensitive device containing delicate mechanical structures. It is made of very thin pieces of
lead (Pb) and interspersed with Aluminum (Al).
• Do not drop the grid.
• Do not allow objects to hit/impact the grid.
• Do not immerse grid in water or other liquid.
• Do not peel labels or vinyl covering.
• Inspect the grid for physical damage before use.
• Clean the grid regularly (between each patient) with an approved chemical. Refer to Cleaning (p. A1-
10) for more information.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A1-9
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A1: Detector Overview

Cleaning
All exterior surfaces—detector, tether, and grid—should be cleaned after each exam.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
• The detector and grid must be allowed to dry before use.
• Do not leave disposable wipes or cleaning cloths on the detector or grid for more than 60 seconds.
• Let the detector dry at least 60 seconds between cleanings.

The following chemicals and products have been tested and approved by GE for cleaning the GE Portable
DR Detector, grid, and tether.
• Cidex OPA
• Gigasept FF
• T-Spray
• Inciden Plus
• Perasafe
• Ster-Bac Blue
• Super Sani-Cloth Germicidal Wipes
• TriGene

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


• Isopropyl Alcohol (70% maximum solution)
• Bleach (50% solution)

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A1-10
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A1: Detector Overview

Specifications

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Detector Size and Weight
Table A1-2 Detector size and weight specifications

Item Specification

Overall detector size Thickness: 27mm


• Including handle Width:465mm
• Not including tether Height:585mm

Image Size 2022 x 2022 pixels or


The active area of the x-ray panel 40.4 x 40.4 cm

Weight 6 kg
Not including the tether or grid

Tether The tether is at least 4.5 meters in length.


The detector interfaces with the external controller via

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


one tether cable that contains 2 connections,
communication interface (with external controller), and
power interface (with detector power supply)

Environmental Constraints
Table A1-3 describes the environmental conditions that the detector is designed to withstand.

CAUTION: Operation or storage outside of these constraints may cause damage to the detector.
Table A1-3 Environmental Constraints

Non Operating Environment


Item Operating Environment Constraints
Constraints

This column contains additional This column defines additional Non-


operating environmental constraints, operating environmental constraints,
within which the subsystem function within which the subsystem function
and performance capabilities shall be and performance capabilities shall be
in compliance. in compliance, when returned to the
operational state, within operating
environment conditions.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A1-11
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A1: Detector Overview

Non Operating Environment


Item Operating Environment Constraints
Constraints

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Ambient • External ambient temperature • External ambient temperature
• Temperature range: +10 ºC to +30 ºC. range: 0ºC to +50 ºC.
• Humidity • Rate of temperature change: • Rate of temperature change:
10 ºC per hour 20 ºC per hour
• Pressure
• Ambient humidity range: 10% to • Ambient humidity range: 5% to 95%,
80%, non condensing. non condensing.
• Rate of humidity change: 30% per • Rate of humidity change: 30% per
hour. hour.
• Atmospheric pressure (altitude) • Atmospheric pressure (altitude)
range: -400 meters to +3000 meters range: -100 meters to +15,000
relative to sea level. meters relative to sea level (to
support pressurized transport)

Mechanical The detector assembly shall not be The detector assembly shall not be
Stress & exposed to operating vibration exposed to non-operating vibration
Vibration spectrum exceeding the following spectrum exceeding the following
Forces parameters: parameters:

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


• Type: Random • Type: Random
• Frequency Range: 20 to 350 Hz • Frequency Range: 10 to 2000 Hz
• Magnitude: 0.006g2 /Hz at 10-350 • Magnitude: 6 m/s2 RMS or
Hz 0.02g2 /Hz at 10-2000 Hz
• Duration: 8 hours/axis (x, y, z) • Duration: 15 minutes/axis (x, y, z)

Shipping & Not applicable. The non-operating shipping conditions


Storage shall be -20 to +60 with the detector
Environment and packing.
The shipping container shall protect
the detector from vibration of 2 Grms
for 8 hours in the x, y, and z axes,
random vibration from 10 to 2000 Hz
such that the image quality is not
degraded.
Cargo hold during shipment shall be
within the atmospheric pressure range
of 700-1100hPa

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A1-12
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A2: General Information

Chapter A2: General Information

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
This chapter explains some of the basic operations and features of the system such as how to start up
and shutdown the system software, how to login and log off, and how to view system status and
messages.
Topics covered include:

• Virtual Keyboard (p. A2-2) (mobile systems)


– International Language Configuration (p. A2-3)
• Software Start Up and Shutdown (p. A2-4)
– Start Up (p. A2-4)
– Shutdown (p. A2-4)
• Login and Log off (p. A2-5)
– Invalid Password Message (p. A2-6)
– Emergency Login (p. A2-6)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


– Inactivity Timeout (p. A2-7)
– Log Off (p. A2-7)
• Wireless Network Connection (p. A2-7) (mobile systems)
– Software Reset (p. A2-8)
• System Reset (p. A2-9)
• Lead Markers (p. A2-9)
• System Status and Messages (p. A2-10)
– Expose Hold (p. A2-10)
– System Status Area (p. A2-10)
– Message Log (p. A2-11)

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A2-1
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A2: General Information

Virtual Keyboard
When used in a mobile system, the GE Portable DR Detector software works with a touch screen instead

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
of a keyboard and mouse. The GE Portable DR Detector provides a “virtual keyboard” on screen that
allows you to enter text and numbers.
The virtual keyboard (Figure A2-1) automatically appears on screen whenever you touch a text box or the
[KEYBOARD] button.
Figure A2-1 Virtual keyboard

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


The virtual keyboard functions like a typewriter or computer keyboard, but instead of pushing actual
keys, you press the corresponding buttons on screen to make letters and numbers appear in the text box
at the top of the keyboard screen.
1. Touch a text box on a screen.
Š The virtual keyboard appears.
2. Type letters and numbers as appropriate for the text box.
Š Letters and numbers appear in the box at the top of the screen as they are pressed.
a) To correct a mistake, press the [BACKSPACE] button to erase the mistake and re-type the correct
information. [BACKSPACE] will erase one letter at a time.
b) To type capital letters or symbols, press either [SHIFT] key and then press the letter or symbol.
The [SHIFT] key will automatically turn off after one letter or symbol has been pressed.
c) To type in all capital letters, press the [CAPS] key. The keyboard will type in all capital letters until
the [CAPS] key is pressed again.
3. Press the [DONE] button.
Š The virtual keyboard closes and your information is entered into the text box.
Š [CANCEL] closes the keyboard without entering any text into the text box.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A2-2
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A2: General Information

International Language Configuration


When the system is configured for a specific non-English speaking country, the virtual keyboard is also

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
updated to provide for special characters and accents for that language. This keyboard will function
similarly to a physical keyboard for that country (Figure A2-2).
The keyboard will provide access to these special characters through use of the [SHIFT] key, and the
[AltGr] key.
The keyboard may provide a [Comp] key for adding accents to letters.
1. Press the [Comp] key.
2. Press the accent key.
3. Press the letter to which you want to add the accent.
Figure A2-2 Virtual keyboard for French

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A2-3
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A2: General Information

Software Start Up and Shutdown


This section describes the procedure for starting up and shutting down the GE Portable DR Detector

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
software only.

Start Up
Refer to Chapter 7: Maintenance and Service-Periodic Maintenance by Service Personnel (p. 7-1) for
important information about the circuit breaker.
1. Turn the key switch to the ON position.
Š The unit performs diagnostics (self-tests to make sure everything is working correctly). This
process takes a few seconds.
2. When the technique and battery status displays light up, the unit is ready for operation. TESTING
COMPLETE will also briefly appear on the message display.
Š The unit may take 3 minutes for the digital detector software to boot up. You may drive the unit
before the software finishes booting, but you cannot take acquisitions until the software is fully
booted.
3. If SYSTEM -- XX FAILED is displayed, turn the unit OFF then ON again. If SYSTEM -- XX FAILED displays

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


again, write down the alphanumeric code (XX represents the code) and contact your service
representative.

Shutdown
1. Close all current exams.
2. Press the [UTILITY] button at the top of the Worklist screen.
Figure A2-3 Utility button

3. Select System on the Utilities screen.


Figure A2-4 Utilities – System screen

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A2-4
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A2: General Information

4. Press [POWER OFF]. Hold the button for 5 seconds.


Š A message appears: “The system will be shut down.”

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
NOTE: Refer to Software Reset (p. A2-8) for information about the Software Reset function.
5. Press [YES] to proceed with shut down.
Š [CANCEL] stops the system from shutting down and returns you to the Utilities screen.
NOTE: You must wait 15 seconds after power is removed from the system before powering the system
back up.

Login and Log off


This following sections apply if the system is configured for Login ability in the Service User Interface.
Refer to Appendix B: Login Administration for information on administering the login function.

Standard Login
The Login screen (Figure A2-5) appears when the system is started, reset, and after a user logs off. The

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


system may also be configured to display the Login screen if the system has been inactive for a specified
period of time (inactivity timeout).
Figure A2-5 Example login screen.

Follow this process to login to the system.


1. Start up the system or log off the previous user.
Š The Login screen appears.
2. Enter your Login Name, if necessary.
3. Type in your Password.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A2-5
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A2: General Information

4. Press [LOGIN].
Š The Worklist appears.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
NOTE: If you have administrator access, a message appears: “You have both regular user and admin user
privileges. To access the admin screen, select the check box before continuing with the login,
otherwise just continue with the login.”
– To login and begin working with the unit, press [LOGON] and the Worklist appears.
– To login and access login administrator functions, select the Enter admin screen checkbox
and then press [LOGON]. The Login Administration screen appears. Refer to Appendix B: Log-
in Administration for more information.

Invalid Password Message


Your Password must be entered correctly for you to log in. If the password you entered is not the correct
password for the entered Login Name, an error message will appear.
1. Make sure that the correct Login Name is displayed in the field. Depending on the configuration, the
Login Name may be case sensitive. That is, “aBc” is not the same Login Name as “Abc.”
2. Retype your Password carefully. Your password is case sensitive; that is, “xYz” is not the same

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


password as “Xyz.”
3. Press [LOGON].
Š Contact your technical support group or system administrator if you still are not able to login.

Emergency Login
Emergency Login is a HIPAA required function to allow quick access to medical systems in the event of an
emergency. Depending on the system’s configuration, this option may not be available. Refer to
Appendix B: Login Administration to configure the Emergency Login function.
Emergency Login will allow exposures, but does not allow connection to HIS/RIS or PACS hosts.

CAUTION: The Emergency Login function should NOT be used when there is time to login normally,
when there is time to receive assistance from technical support, or if there is no emergency
situation. Your facility may track the use of this function.
1. Press [EMERGENCY LOGON].
Š Depending on the system’s configuration, you may be prompted to enter your name. Enter your
name and press [LOGIN].
2. The Worklist screen appears.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A2-6
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A2: General Information

Inactivity Timeout
Depending on the system’s configuration, the system may show the Login screen after a specified period

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
of inactivity. The Login screen acts as a screen saver, covering displayed information to protect patient
privacy.
The administrator configures if the system will timeout and how long the system must be inactive before
the Login screen appears. Refer to Appendix B: Login Administration to configure the inactivity timeout
function.
To access the system screens, follow the Standard Login or Emergency Login process described above.

Log Off
1. Close, suspend, or discontinue any open exams, if necessary.
2. Close the Image Viewer, if necessary.
3. Press [LOGOFF] at the top of the Worklist or Image Management screen.
Š Or open the Utility screen, go to System and press [LOGOFF] (Figure A2-6).
Figure A2-6 Utilities screen logoff button

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Š A message appears: “Do you really want to log off?”
4. Press [OK].
Š The Login screen appears.
Š [CANCEL] closes the screen and returns you to the last screen.

Wireless Network Connection


Wireless is a purchasable option that allows the unit to connect to the facility wireless network without
the cable. This allows you to update the Worklist or print and send images while the unit is moving or if
you are in a location that does not have a cable network port. Please contact your GE Service
representative to activate this option.
The unit cannot be connected to the network by both the wired and by wireless at the same time. To
switch between wired and wireless, a software reset must be performed. The unit will automatically
choose the wireless connection if the cable is not connected; if the cable is connected, the unit will
choose the wired connection. Refer to Software Reset (p. A2-8) for more information.
1. To change from Wireless to Wired: Plug LAN data cable into system. Reset system at tools in
preferences. Wired mode of transfer will be engaged
2. To change form Wired to Wireless: Unplug unit data cable from system. Reset system at tools in
preferences. Wireless mode of transfer will be engaged. Icons will appear on the bottom of the
screens.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A2-7
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A2: General Information

NOTE: Do not obstruct the antenna by covering it with metal, such as a lead apron. This will affect the
signal strength.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
The wireless icon appears on the bottom of the Worklist, Image Acquisition, Image Viewer, and Image
Management screens. The icon shows wireless status (on or off) and the signal strength as described in
Table A2-1.
Table A2-1 Wireless signal strength states

Icon Description Icon Description

“X” only – Wireless feature 3 yellow bars – Good signal


disabled

No colored bars, no “X” – No signal 4 green bars – Very Good signal

1 red bar – Extremely Low signal 5 green bars – Excellent signal

2 yellow bars – Low signal

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Software Reset
A software reset switches the unit between wired and wireless network connection. That is, the unit will
automatically choose the wireless connection if the cable is not connected; if the cable is connected, the
unit will choose the wired connection.
NOTE: Software reset does not require Shutdown or a System Reset.
Follow this process to perform a software reset.
1. Connect or disconnect the network cable as appropriate.
2. On the Worklist or Image Management screen, press [UTILITIES].
Š The System – System screen (Figure A2-7) appears.
Figure A2-7 System – System screen with Software Reset button

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A2-8
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A2: General Information

3. Press [SOFTWARE RESET].


Š A message appears: “Press OK to restart Software Application. Press Cancel to return.“

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
4. Press [OK].
Š A “Loading Application” progress bar appears on screen.
Š The login screen appears once the software has been reset.
5. Login to the system to begin work.

System Reset
A controlled system reset should be performed once a week before routine QAP. Refer to Chapter A8:
Quality Assurance Process and Maintenance for more information.
System reset is used as a last resort if the detector software stops working. A system reset may take 3
minutes to complete.
NOTE: The system will not be available for acquiring images during the reset cycle.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


1. If possible, close, suspend, or discontinue any open exams.
2. If possible, log off the system.
3. Turn the key switch to the OFF position, then turn the key switch to the ON position and wait until the
Login or Worklist screen appears.
Š As the system resets, various screens will appear on the monitor. This is normal.
Š The system will auto-start and either the Login screen or Worklist screen will appear (depending
on how your system is configured) when the system is ready.

Lead Markers
As in any General Radiography procedure, lead marker placement is important to ensure markers are
properly recorded on the image. Place the lead marker in an area of patient attenuation. If lead markers
are placed in regions of direct radiation (saturation), there is a high risk they will be processed out of the
image during image processing. Saturated areas beyond the anatomy are no longer part of the final
image. This is most likely to happen on high technique exposures.

CAUTION: Exercise care when placing lead markers to guarantee their presence in the final image.
Every attempt must be made to assure markers are not located in regions of direct
radiation, but are located in regions where some patient attenuation of radiation is present
without obstructing the anatomical information of interest.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A2-9
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A2: General Information

System Status and Messages


Several types of messages and indicators are displayed on the Acquisition Workstation screens to inform

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
you of the system and subsystem operational status as well as error messages. The complete list of error
messages is available in the Service Manual.

Expose Hold
The Expose Hold button (Figure A2-8) appears at the bottom of the Worklist or Acquisition screens when
there is some condition that prevents an x-ray from being taken, such as exam is open or the protocol is
not selected.
Press the Expose Hold button to view a list of all errors and interlocks that are preventing the exposure
(Figure A2-8). The items are removed from the list as they are corrected. The Expose Hold button
disappears when all errors and interlocks are corrected.
Figure A2-8 Worklist and Acquisition screen Expose Hold button

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Figure A2-9 Example system Inhibits list

System Status Area


System status messages are displayed on the bottom of all main Workstation screens (Figure A2-10).
System Status messages are displayed when the system detects an irregularity in system operation. The
message informs you when remedial action is required to correct the situation.
A console beep announces the arrival of an informational message. There are situations where a system
condition is detected that does not require stopping the procedure. The message tells you to Continue or
to Continue/Call Service (continue and call service).
NOTE: To clear the system status area, open the Message Log (described below) and close it again.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A2-10
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A2: General Information

Figure A2-10 Example of a System Status message

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Message Log
Pressing the Message Log button at the bottom of any screen opens the Message Log (Figure A2-11). The
Message Log shows all status messages since the last system restart. The messages are listed in
descending chronological order, that is, the latest message is listed first. This screen allows operators
and service personnel to display, review, and analyze system status messages.
Figure A2-11 Message Log

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A2-11
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A3: Worklist

Chapter A3: Worklist

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
The Worklist is the starting point for patient set up and selecting procedures for acquisition. All exams
begin from this screen.
The Worklist information and functions are based on DICOM standards.
This chapter explains the procedures for entering data into the system and setting up a patient.
Topics covered include:
• Overview (p. A3-1)
– Patient List Columns (p. A3-6)
• Manage List / Find Procedures (p. A3-7)
– Search (p. A3-7)
– Sort by Column (p. A3-7)
– Filter List (p. A3-8)
– Refresh (p. A3-11)
• Select Procedures (p. A3-12)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


• Delete Procedures (p. A3-12)
• Add / Edit Patient Information (p. A3-15)
– Overview (p. A3-15)
– Add Patient (p. A3-18)
– Edit Patient Information (p. A3-19)

Overview
The Worklist (Figure A3-1) shows scheduled, completed, discontinued, suspended, and active procedures.
The majority of the Worklist is the Patient List. The Patient List is a large table made of columns and rows.
Each row in the list is a procedure, or exam, to be performed. A patient may have multiple procedures
(rows) on the Worklist.
Procedures listed can be classified under two categories:
• Locally entered procedures: This category refers to procedures entered directly on the mobile unit or
system workstation by manually entering the information. Locally entered procedures are only
available to the unit or workstation that they were entered on. They do not update automatically and
no other units or workstations can access them.
• Hospital Information System (HIS) or Radiology Information System (RIS) Procedures: This category
refers to procedures that the Worklist can automatically update from the central HIS/RIS database.
Other units or workstations can be configured to access these procedures. If the GE Portable DR
Detector is used in a mobile unit, the Worklist can only update with new information from the HIS or
RIS if the unit is connected to the facility network.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A3-1
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A3: Worklist

Figure A3-1 Worklist screen

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
Table A3-1 lists and describes all the functions on the Worklist screen.
Table A3-1 Worklist Functions

Function Description

navigation bar Allows you to change between the Worklist, Image Management,
and Utilities screens or allows you to logoff the system (if
applicable). The darker color indicates which screen is currently
displayed. The individual buttons are described below.

[WORKLIST] Opens the Worklist screen where patient procedures may be


added to the schedule and exams started.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A3-2
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A3: Worklist

Function Description

[IMAGE MANAGEMENT] Opens the Image Management screen where images may be

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
selected for viewing or be copied to other exams.
Refer to Chapter A6: Image Management for more information.

[UTILITIES] Opens a screen where system settings (such as Network and


Printer connections) and preferences may be changed. If the
Login function is enabled, the preferences you are allowed to
change will vary depending on your level of access.
Refer to Chapter A7: Set Preferences for more information.

[LOG OFF] If the Login function is enabled, pressing this button logs the
current user off of the system.
Refer to Chapter A2: General Information-Login and Log off (p. A2-
5) for more information.

Search Searches for procedures by the selected column name in the


drop-down list and the search criteria entered into the text box.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


For mobile units, Search is only available when the unit is
connected to the network.
Refer to Search (p. A3-7) for more information.

[KEYBOARD] Brings up the virtual keyboard so that you may type text into the
Search text box.
Refer to Chapter A2: General Information-Virtual Keyboard (p. A2-
2) for more information.

[REFRESH LIST] Updates the Worklist view with new information from the HIS or
RIS, which shows changes to the procedure records. Also removes
any filters that have been applied.
For mobile units, refresh is only available when the unit is
connected to the network.
Refer to Refresh (p. A3-11) for more information on automatically
refreshing the Worklist.

[FILTER LIST] Displays a Worklist query screen and filters the RIS or HIS records
to find procedures that meet specific criteria.
For mobile units, filtering is only available when the unit is
connected to the network.
Refer to Filter List (p. A3-8) for information on how to filter the
Worklist.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A3-3
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A3: Worklist

Function Description

Patient List Area Shows all procedures scheduled for examinations during a

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
working day. Procedures on the list may be downloaded from the
RIS/HIS or may be created locally.
The list may be sorted by column, searched, or filtered. Refer to
Manage List / Find Procedures (p. A3-7) for more information.
The time period displayed is configurable. Refer to Chapter A7: Set
Preferences-Worklist (p. A7-13) for information on changing the
time period displayed.

[PATIENT INFORMATION] Shows the Patient Information screen for the selected procedure.
NOTE: Patient Information is editable if the currently selected
procedure has not been opened. Once the exam starts the
Patient Information is no longer editable. Patient
Information is not editable if multiple procedures are
selected.
Refer to Add / Edit Patient Information (p. A3-15) for more
information.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


[ADD PATIENT] Allows you to enter patient information and adds the patient to
the Patient List.
Refer to Add / Edit Patient Information (p. A3-15) for more
information.

[DELETE] or [DELETE ALL] Switches between [DELETE] and [DELETE ALL] to remove
procedures from the Worklist.
[DELETE] - Removes the selected procedure or procedures from
the Patient List.
[DELETE ALL] - Removes all completed and discontinued
procedures from the Patient List.
NOTE: [DELETE] or [DELETE ALL] does not remove procedures from
the RIS or HIS or remove any exam images from the image
database.
Refer to Delete Procedures (p. A3-12) for more information.

[START EXAM] or [RESUME Starts, continues, or appends the selected procedure.


EXAM] The button name changes depending on the Scheduled Status of
the selected procedure. If the selected procedure has a Status of
“Suspended”, the button name changes to
[RESUME EXAM].

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A3-4
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A3: Worklist

Function Description

[EMERGENCY EXAM] Begins an exam without selecting a procedure from the Patient

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
List or adding the patient. The system will assign a unique
tracking number as the Patient Name.
Refer to Chapter A4: Image Acquisition-Conduct an Emergency
Exam (p. A4-12) for more information.
The tracking number is the date and time the exam was initiated.
The time is recorded to the second.

[CASSETTE EXAM] Begins a cassette exam. Cassette exams allow exposures to be


taken without any digital patient record or image storage.
Refer to Chapter A4: Image Acquisition-Conduct a Cassette Exam
(p. A4-10) for more information.

network connection status Appears when the Definium AMX 700 is connected to the hospital
network.

wireless network connection If the wireless network connection is enabled, displays the status

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


status of the connection and signal strength. Refer to Chapter A2:
General Information-Wireless Network Connection (p. A2-7) for
more information.

system status Displays the last system status message.


To clear the system status area, open the Message Log and close
it again.
Refer to Chapter A2: General Information-System Status and
Messages (p. A2-10) for more information.

[MESSAGE LOG] Brings up the message log since the last system re-start.
Refer to Chapter A2: General Information-System Status and
Messages (p. A2-10) for more information.

[QAP] Brings up the screens that allow you to perform QAP.


Refer to Chapter A8: Quality Assurance Process and Maintenance
for more information.

[EXPOSE HOLD] Appears when there is some condition that prevents an x-ray
from being taken.
Press the button to view a list of all errors and interlocks that are
preventing the exposure. The items are removed from the list as
they are corrected. The button disappears when all errors and
interlocks are corrected.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A3-5
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A3: Worklist

Patient List Columns


Table A3-2 describes the columns on the Worklist. This information comes from what has been entered

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
in the Patient Information screen. Refer to Overview (p. A3-15) for detailed descriptions of the information
presented.
Table A3-2 Worklist columns

Column Description

Date The date the procedure is scheduled to occur. On locally added procedures, the
current date is the default.

Patient The full name of the patient as entered in Add Patient/Patient Information screen.

Patient ID The patient’s medical record number or any number that distinguishes the patient.

Accession # The exam’s accession number.

Description The procedure ordered for the accession number. (This is the content of the
Procedure Description field on the Add Information screen.)

Physician The name of the physician or technician who performed the exam. (This is the

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


content of the Performing Physician field on the Add Information screen.)

Modality The modality of the procedure.

Status The status of the procedure.


Available options are:
• Scheduled – procedure has been created but not started.
• Completed – procedure has been closed.
• Suspended – procedure was started then interrupted.
• Discontinued – procedure was opened but cannot be completed.
Refer to Chapter A4: Image Acquisition-End Exam (p. A4-13) for more information
about Completed, Suspended, and Discontinued exams.

Location For mobile units, the location of the patient within the facility.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A3-6
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A3: Worklist

Manage List / Find Procedures


The Worklist has several features that allow you to find patients and procedures quickly and to organize

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
the list to your preferences.
Search, Filters, and Sorting allow you to control the display of the procedures in the Worklist.

Search
The Search feature finds procedures by column.
For mobile units, Search is only available when the unit is connected to the network.
Figure A3-2 Search by column drop-down list

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


1. Press the button on the Search By drop-down list to select the column you want to search.
Š If the column you want is already selected, begin at step 3.
2. Select the column. For example, Patient Name.
Š The list is sorted by the selected column in alphabetical or numerical order.
3. Type the search criteria into the text box. For units equipped with touch screens, refer to Chapter A2:
General Information-Virtual Keyboard (p. A2-2) for information on how to use the virtual keyboard to
“type” information into a text box.
Š The list automatically goes to the first procedure that matches the entered criteria.
Š If the list is long enough, it will scroll to the first item so that it appears at the top of the list.
NOTE: The text box is not case sensitive. That is, it does not matter if you used upper or lower case.
Š If no procedures match what you have typed, the list de-selects all procedures and places the
closest match at the top of the Worklist.

Sort by Column
Sorting allows you to organize the procedures by the column of your choice.
1. Press the column heading you want to sort, or choose the column in the Search By drop-down list.
For example, if you want to see all the procedures that have a status of “Suspended”, press the
“Status” column heading.
Š An arrow appears in the column heading to indicate which column is currently being sorted.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A3-7
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A3: Worklist

2. Press the column heading again to switch between ascending and descending order.
Š An up-pointing arrow indicates that the column is sorted in ascending order. That is, sorted in

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
alphabetical order or numerical order from smallest to largest.
Š A down-pointing arrow indicates that the column is sorted in descending order. That is, sorted in
reverse alphabetical order or numerical order from largest to smallest.
Figure A3-3 Column with ascending sort

Filter List
Use filters to only display items corresponding to your chosen criteria, e.g., exams taken only within a
specified time period, patients whose last names begin with the letter ‘J’, or patient IDs beginning with
the digits ‘547’.
Filters cannot be saved.
For mobile units, Filter List is only available when the unit is connected to the network. Also, mobile units
will not be able to retrieve information from other units.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Pressing [REFRESH] will remove any filter that has been applied.
Figure A3-4 Worklist filter screen

The filter screen has several options for accepting or rejecting the information from the Worklist.
Table A3-3 describes the filter screen functions.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A3-8
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A3: Worklist

Table A3-3 Filter Acceptance/Rejection Buttons

Function Description

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Show list for Filters the Worklist items by system or modality.
• This system – procedures entered locally on the unit
• All systems in modality – procedures for all digital x-ray
• All systems – procedures for all modalities

Include Allows you to include or exclude completed or cancelled (discontinued) exams


in the filter.

Date Allows you to select the date of exams to filter by.


• All – procedures scheduled for any date
• Range - procedures scheduled for a specified range of time
• Today – procedures scheduled for the current date

From (mm/dd/yyyy) When the “Range” option is selected for the date, allows you to enter dates or
To (mm/dd/yyyy) pick dates from a calendar screen.

Patient Information Allows you to filter based on data from the Patient Information screen.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Available options are:
• Last Name
• First Name
• Accession #
• Patient ID
The filter may be restricted by any or all of these fields. Leaving a field blank
means that it will not be included in the filter.

[OK] Applies the filter and returns you to the results on the Worklist.

[CANCEL] Clears the Filter screen and returns you to the Worklist.

Follow this process to filter the Worklist.


NOTE: The fields may be completed in any order.
1. Press [FILTER LIST] on the Worklist screen.
Š The Filter Screen appears
2. Select the Show list for option.
3. Select the Include options.
4. Select the Date option.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A3-9
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A3: Worklist

5. If you selected Range for the Date option, enter or select the From and To dates.
Š The current date appears in both the From and To fields by default.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Š To select dates from the calendar:
a) Press the [CALENDAR] button.
Figure A3-5 Calendar button

– The Filter calendar screen appears with the current date selected.
Figure A3-6 Filter calendar screen

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


b) Press [] to select the previous month, if necessary.
c) Press [] to select the next month, if necessary.

d) Press a date to select it.


– The calendar closes automatically when a date is clicked.
6. Enter any Patient Information you want to filter by.
Š You do not need to enter full words or numbers into these text boxes.
Š Entering more information into these text boxes will reduce the number of results.
Š Entering less or no information into these text boxes will increase the number of results.
NOTE: The Patient Information text boxes are case sensitive.
7. Press [OK].
Š The Filter screen closes and the Worklist screen appears with only those procedures that met all of
the filtering criteria.
Š If no procedures met all the criteria, the Worklist will be blank.
8. Press [REFRESH] to remove the filter.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A3-10
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A3: Worklist

Refresh
Some systems are configured to automatically refresh the Worklist with data from the HIS/RIS on a

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
regular basis (such as every 10 minutes). However, if your system does not automatically refresh—or you
want to refresh the list before the scheduled time—you are able to refresh the list manually.
For mobile units, Refresh only functions when the unit is connected to the network. If the unit is not
connected to the network, pressing the [REFRESH] button only displays the current Worklist data.
The Refresh feature also removes any filtering that has been applied. Refer to Filter List (p. A3-8) for more
information.
Manual Refresh
Follow this process to manually refresh the Worklist.
1. Press [REFRESH] on the Worklist.
Š The Worklist updates with HIS/RIS data and removes any filtering.
NOTE: Refresh does not remove locally added procedures.
NOTE: You will not be able to make selections or access Worklist functions while the Worklist is refreshing.
Auto Refresh

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


The Auto Refresh interval is set on the Preferences – Worklist screen in System Utilities. Refer to
Chapter A7: Set Preferences-Worklist (p. A7-13) for more information.
When the system auto refreshes, a message (Figure A3-7) appears: “Auto Refresh in progress. Please
wait.” The message remains until the refresh process is complete.
NOTE: You will not be able to make selections or access Worklist functions while the Worklist is refreshing.
Figure A3-7 Auto refresh message

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A3-11
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A3: Worklist

Select Procedures
Use the following processes to select a patient from the Worklist. This process assumes the patient

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
already exists on the system. If the patient is not on the Worklist, you must add the patient first. Refer to
Overview (p. A3-15) for more information.

Select a Single Procedure


1. Close or suspend any open exams, if necessary. Refer to Chapter A4: Image Acquisition-End Exam
(p. A4-13) for more information.
Š The Worklist screen appears.
2. Select the procedure from the Worklist.
3. Refer to Chapter A4: Image Acquisition to conduct the exam.

Select Multiple Procedures


You may select multiple procedures for the same patient to begin image acquisition.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


NOTE: The Patient Name, Patient ID #, and Exam Date must match exactly in order to be selected.
1. Sort the Worklist by Patient Name, if necessary.
2. Press procedure.
3. Press another procedure for the same patient.
4. Continue pressing procedures until all procedures for the patient are selected.
5. Press any other procedure to deselect the procedures.

Delete Procedures
You may remove procedures from the Worklist individually or all completed, discontinued, and locally
added procedures at once.
The [DELETE] button is able to switch between individual delete or delete all.
NOTE: Deleted procedures cannot be recovered or “undeleted.”
To switch the button between “Delete” and “Delete All”:
1. Press on the small arrow on the right side of the button.
Š A list appears with the available actions.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A3-12
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A3: Worklist

Figure A3-8 Delete button options

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
2. Press the action you want to perform.
Š The system performs the action and the button name changes to the selection you made. The
button will perform the selected action each time it is pressed until you change it.
NOTE: [DELETE] or [DELETE ALL] does not remove procedures from the RIS or HIS. [DELETE] or [DELETE
ALL] does not remove any exam images from the image database.

Delete a Single Procedure


1. Select the procedure to delete.
2. Press [DELETE]. If necessary, switch the button to [DELETE].

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Š A message appears: “Are you sure that you would like to delete the selected items?”
3. Press [OK] to delete the procedures.
Š [CANCEL] retains the procedures and the Worklist appears.

Delete All Completed, Discontinued, and Local Procedures


1. Press [DELETE ALL]. If necessary, switch the button to [DELETE ALL].
Š A message appears: “All Completed, Discontinued, and locally scheduled exams will be deleted
from this list. Any suspended exams will need to be individually deleted.”
2. Press [OK] to delete the procedures.
Š The selected procedures are deleted and the Worklist appears.
Š [CANCEL] closes the message, retains the procedures, and takes you back to the Worklist.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A3-13
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A3: Worklist

Delete Suspended Procedures


Suspended procedures cannot be deleted unless their status is changed to “Completed” or

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
“Discontinued”
1. Select the suspended procedure to delete.
Š A message appears: “The patient entry you are trying to delete is still in progress. Would you like to
mark the patient as ‘Completed’ / ‘Discontinued’ and proceed with deletion?”
2. Press [COMPLETE] or [DISCONTINUE].
Š [COMPLETE] changes the Status to of the procedures to “Completed.” If enabled, any acquired
images are auto pushed, auto printed, and sent to PACS.
Š [DISCONTINUE] changes the Status to “Discontinued.” Any acquired images are marked as
Discontinued and the information is sent to PACS.
Š [CANCEL] closes the message and returns you to the Worklist without deleting procedures.
Š The procedures are removed from the Worklist.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A3-14
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A3: Worklist

Add / Edit Patient Information

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Overview
The Add Patient (Figure A3-9) and Patient Information screens allow you to enter patient and procedure
information before starting an exam or to view the information at any time.
NOTE: This screen may also be known as the Medical Procedure Card or MPC.
• To add a patient to the Worklist, press [ADD PATIENT] and enter or select the appropriate information.
NOTE: Make sure the patient’s name, ID number, birth date, and gender information are entered correctly.

CAUTION: Use only standard alphanumeric characters to complete the screen.


• To view the patient information from the Worklist or Image Management screens, select the exam
then press [PATIENT INFORMATION]. Patient information is not editable when launched from the
Image Management screen.
• To view the patient information from the Acquisition or Image Viewer screens, press [PATIENT
INFORMATION]. Patient information is not editable when launched from these screens.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Patient Information provided by the HIS/RIS is not editable.
Patient Information entered locally is editable until the exam is started. It is not editable after the exam is
started or in progress.
NOTE: The Patient Information button is unavailable when multiple exams are selected at the same time.
Figure A3-9 Add Patient or Patient Information

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A3-15
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A3: Worklist

Table A3-4 Patient Information description

Function Description

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Patient Section

First Name Identifies the patient’s first name.

Middle Name Identifies the patient’s middle name or initials.

Last Name Identifies the patient’s last name.


NOTE: Emergency Exams automatically fill this field with a system-generated
identification, which is the word “NEW” followed by a date and time stamp of
the second the Emergency Exam button was pressed. For example:
NEW050622140345. The exam was initiated in year 05, month 06, day 22, hour
14, minute 03, and second 45.

Location Identifies the patient’s location. The HIS or RIS usually completes this field.

ID Identifies the patient’s medical record number or any number that distinguishes the
patient. This number must be unique.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Gender Defines the sex of the patient. By default, “Other” is selected when the screen first
opens.

Birth Date Identifies the patient’s birthday in the format dd/mm/yyyy.


If the date is not entered in the correct format, the screen will show the date field in
red when [START EXAM] or [SAVE] is pressed.

In the above example, the year was entered with only 2 digits (“45” instead of
“1945”).

Age Identifies the patient’s age. The field updates with the correct age when the Birth
Date is entered.

Exam Section

Procedure Describes the procedure or series to be performed.


Description

Accession Identifies the exam’s accession number.


Number

Operator Identifies the operator’s name or initials. You can use the drop-down list to select
commonly used names, or type the name into the drop-down list box.
Refer to Chapter A7: Set Preferences-Preset Names (p. A7-15) for information on
adding names to the drop-down list.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A3-16
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A3: Worklist

Function Description

Performing Identifies the Radiologist or performing physician. You can use the drop-down list to

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Physician select commonly used names, or type the name into the drop-down list box.
Refer to Chapter A7: Set Preferences-Preset Names (p. A7-15) for information on
adding names to the drop-down list.

Referring Identifies the referring physician. You can use the drop-down list to select
Physician commonly used names, or type the name into the drop-down list box.
Refer to Chapter A7: Set Preferences-Preset Names (p. A7-15) for information on
adding names to the drop-down list.

Status Displays the status of the selected exam.


When adding a patient, the only option is “Scheduled”.
Patient Information options are:
• Scheduled - The procedure has been added to the Worklist, but the exam has not
started.
• Suspended - An exam was started but interrupted before completion. The exam
may be resumed at a later time.
• Complete - The exam is one that has been “Closed” on the Acquisition screen or

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


marked as “Complete” on the Patient Information screen. Completed exams are
sent to the PACS (where available).
• Discontinued - The procedure was opened, but no exposures were taken. The
exam may be started at a later time or the procedure deleted.
• In progress - The exam is currently in progress.

Study ID (RAD Displays the procedure ID number.


#)

Exam Date Sets the scheduled date of the selected exam. By default, the current date is
automatically inserted. You may change this date as necessary.

Exam Time Sets the time for the patient’s exam to be performed. By default, the time when the
[ADD PATIENT] button was clicked is automatically inserted. You may change this
time as necessary.

Modality Displays the modality of the exam. The abbreviation for x-ray is DX.

Comments Provides a space for any notes or information not listed in any other field.

[START EXAM] Displays the Select Protocol screen in preparation for making exposures. Refer to
Chapter A4: Image Acquisition-Select or Change Protocols (p. A4-7) for more
information.This also adds the patient name to the Worklist.
NOTE: This button does not appear if the Patient Information screen is opened from
the Image Viewer or Image Management screens.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A3-17
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A3: Worklist

Function Description

[SAVE] Adds the patient to the Worklist or saves changes and closes the Add Patient/

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Patient Information screen.
• If the Save button is selected but all of the data fields have not been filled in, a
new patient is created anyway.
• If no patient name has been entered, then the patient name will be listed as “New
Patient”. This allows you to start an exam quickly.

[CANCEL] Erases all newly entered information and closes the Add Patient/Patient Information
screen without updating the Worklist.

Add Patient
Use this procedure to enter the patient’s information into your system.
1. Open the Worklist screen.
Š The Patient Worklist screen appears.
2. Press [ADD PATIENT].

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Š The Add Patient screen appears.
3. Enter the patient information.

CAUTION: Make sure the patient’s name, ID number, birth date, and gender information are entered
correctly.
4. Press [SAVE] or [START EXAM].
Š Press [SAVE] to add the patient to the Worklist and return to the Worklist screen.
Š Press [START EXAM] (if available) to add the patient to the Worklist and begin Acquisition.
Š Press [CANCEL] to close the Add Patient screen without saving changes.
NOTE: For a new exam on a existing patient, the patient information cannot be edited.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A3-18
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A3: Worklist

Edit Patient Information


Patient information can only be edited before any procedure has been opened.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
NOTE: You may only edit patient information for one procedure at a time. If multiple procedures are
selected, the [PATIENT INFORMATION] button is disabled.
1. Select the procedure from the Worklist.
2. Press [PATIENT INFORMATION].
Š The Patient Information screen appears.
3. Edit the information as necessary.
4. Press [SAVE] to record the changes and return to the Worklist.
Š Pressing [CANCEL] closes the Patient Information screen without saving changes.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A3-19
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A4: Image Acquisition

Chapter A4: Image Acquisition

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
This section details the process of acquiring images using the GE Portable DR Detector or free cassette.
Topics covered include:
• Overview (p. A4-1)
• Re-start Completed or Discontinued Exams (p. A4-6)
• Resume Suspended Exams (p. A4-7)
• Select or Change Protocols (p. A4-7)
• Conduct a Digital Exam (p. A4-9)
• Conduct a Cassette Exam (p. A4-10)
• Conduct an Emergency Exam (p. A4-12)
• End Exam (p. A4-13)
– Suspend (p. A4-13)
– Close (p. A4-14)
– Discontinue (p. A4-14)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Overview
The Acquisition screen (Figure A4-1) is where the exam is set up and exposure details are adjusted. This
screen appears when you press the [START EXAM], [EMERGENCY EXAM], or [CASSETTE EXAM] buttons on
the Worklist or [START EXAM] from the Add Patient screen.
NOTE: If you pressed the [CASSETTE EXAM] button, the Acquisition screen will present a limited set of
options. Refer to Conduct a Cassette Exam (p. A4-10) for more information about cassette exams.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A4-1
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A4: Image Acquisition

Figure A4-1 Acquisition screen

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
Table A4-1 Image Acquisition functions

Function Description

patient identification Identifies the patient name and patient identification number for
the current procedure.

[PATIENT INFORMATION] Displays Patient Information screen for the current procedure.
Refer to Chapter A3: Worklist-Add / Edit Patient Information (p. A3-
15) for more information.

screen switch tab Switches between the Acquisition and Viewer screens.
NOTE: When acquiring multiple images or if you need to retake an
image, you must switch back to the Acquisition screen in
order to record the exposure.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A4-2
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A4: Image Acquisition

Function Description

exam If multiple exams were selected from the Worklist, switches

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
between exams for protocol selection, technique adjustment, and
acquisition.
This drop-down list does not appear if a single exam was selected,
or if the exam was initiated with the Emergency Exam or Cassette
Exam buttons on the Worklist.

protocol list Lists the available views for the exam and shows which view is
currently active.

[SELECT PROTOCOLS] Brings up the Select Protocols screen to add, remove, or change

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


protocols.
Refer to Select or Change Protocols (p. A4-7) for more information.

[SUSPEND] Ends the exam with the intent of continuing at a later time. Does
not initiate auto send or auto print, if enabled.
Refer to End Exam (p. A4-13) for more information.

[CLOSE] Closes the procedure. If enabled, [CLOSE] sends billing information


to the PACS system, auto sends, and auto prints acquired images.
Refer to End Exam (p. A4-13) for more information.

[DISCONTINUE] Ends the exam when the procedure has been opened but the
exam cannot continue.
Refer to End Exam (p. A4-13) for more information.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A4-3
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A4: Image Acquisition

Function Description

Patient Size: Allows you to choose the size of the patient being x-rayed.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Available options are:
• Medium Pediatric (toddlers to 5 years old)
• Small Adult
• Medium Adult
• Large Adult
NOTE: Pediatric techniques are set at different system speeds then
adult techniques. For example, the system speed for a
pediatric exam of 70 kV at 32 mAs is 800. The default system
speed for an adult exam of 70 kV at 32 mAs is 400.

Receptor: Selects the receptor for the protocol.


In order from left to right, the options are:
• Free Cassette
• GE Portable DR Detector
NOTE: The generator limits exposure time to two (2) seconds for

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


both receptors.

Reset Technique: Resets the technique to the default protocol settings.

Grid position Shows the recommended grid position for the technique.

SID Shows the recommended SID for the technique.

kV Adjusts the kV.


The up/down buttons on the right of the field adjust the kV by one
unit.
The buttons on the left of the field adjust the kV by 5 units.
The kVp selection range is 40-150, in1 kVp increments.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A4-4
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A4: Image Acquisition

Function Description

mAs Adjusts the mAs.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
The mAs selection is in Renard steps. The available selections are:
0.1, 0.12, 0.16, 0.20, 0.25, 0.32, 0.40, 0.50, 0.64, 0.80, 1.0, 1.25, 1.6,
2.0, 2.5, 3.2, 4.0, 5.0, 6.4, 8.0, 10.0, 12.5, 16.0, 20.0, 25.0, 32.0, 40.0,
50.0, 64.0, 80.0, 100.0, 125.0, 128.0, 160.0, 200.0, 250.0, 256.0,
320.0, 400.0, 500.0, 512.0.
NOTE: Not all mAs selections are available at all kV settings.

Patient Side: If conducting an exam on paired anatomy (for example,


extremities), selects the side of the patient being x-rayed.
Options are:
• Both
• Left
• Right
If conducting an exam on unpaired anatomy, the control is
disabled and displays “Unpaired”, as shown here.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Recommended Position: Displays the recommended patient position relative to the
detector.

network connection status Appears when the Definium AMX 700 is connected to the hospital
network.

wireless network connection If the wireless network connection is enabled, displays the status
status of the connection and signal strength. Refer to Chapter A2:
General Information-Wireless Network Connection (p. A2-7) for
more information.

system status Displays the last system status message.


NOTE: To clear the system status area, open the Message Log and
close it again.
Refer to Chapter A2: General Information-System Status and
Messages (p. A2-10) for more information.

[MESSAGE LOG] Brings up the message log since the last system re-start.
Refer to Chapter A2: General Information-System Status and
Messages (p. A2-10) for more information.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A4-5
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A4: Image Acquisition

Function Description

[QAP] When the yellow alert icon is present, indicates that QAP should be

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
performed to ensure continued image quality.
NOTE: QAP cannot be performed when the Image Acquisition or
Image Viewer screens are displayed. End the exam before
attempting to perform QAP.
Refer to Chapter A8: Quality Assurance Process and Maintenance
for more information.

[EXPOSE HOLD] Appears when there is some condition that prevents an x-ray from
being taken.
Press the button to view a list of all errors and interlocks that are
preventing the exposure. The items are removed from the list as
they are corrected. The button disappears when all errors and
interlocks are corrected.

Re-start Completed or Discontinued Exams

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Procedures with a Status of “Completed” or “Discontinued” cannot be re-opened. However, you may
create a new exam or append the existing exam.
1. Select the procedure(s) from the Worklist.
2. Press [PATIENT INFORMATION] to verify the patient, if necessary.
3. Press [RESUME EXAM].
Š A message appears: “The selected exam has been Discontinued/Completed and cannot be
started/resumed. Would you like to create a new exam for this patient or append to the existing
exam?”
Figure A4-2 Start a discontinued or completed exam message

4. Press the button of the action to perform.


Š [APPEND EXAM] creates a new series within the existing exam and opens the Select Protocols
screen.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A4-6
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A4: Image Acquisition

NOTE: The new exam will be placed under the same accession number as a new series. Check your
facility’s conformance standards before selecting this option because it may effect HIS/RIS or PACS
formats.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Š [NEW EXAM] creates a new exam and series for the patient and opens the Select Protocols screen.
Š [CANCEL] closes the message and returns you to the Worklist.
5. Refer to Select or Change Protocols (p. A4-7) to continue with the exam.

Resume Suspended Exams


Suspended exams may be resumed at any time. The process of resuming a suspended exam is the same
as starting a new exam.
1. Select the exams from the Worklist.
2. Press [RESUME EXAM].
NOTE: Protocol selections and technique changes are not saved in a suspended exam. Protocols must
be reselected and techniques must be re-set.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Select or Change Protocols
The Select Protocols screen (Figure A4-3) appears when you press [START EXAM] on the Worklist or Add
Patient screen or when you press [SELECT PROTOCOLS] on the Acquisition screen.
The select protocols screen is divided into two halves: Available Protocols on the left and Selected
Protocols on the right.
• Available Protocols lists all the protocols currently listed in the database, categorized by anatomical
region: for example, head, chest, spine, and abdomen. Each category expands to show the exam(s)
for that category.
• Selected Protocols lists all currently selected protocols in the following format: anatomy / exam. This
list automatically updates as protocols are selected or removed.
Refer to Chapter A7: Set Preferences-Protocols (p. A7-39) for information on adding protocols to the
protocol database.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A4-7
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A4: Image Acquisition

Figure A4-3 Select Protocols

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Use this process to select or change protocols for a procedure.
1. If multiple procedures were selected from the Worklist, select the procedure from the drop-down list.
Figure A4-4 Select procedure

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


2. Press on an anatomical category (Available Protocols side) to open it.
Š The category expands to show the available exams.
Š Press on the anatomical category name again to close it.
3. Press on an exam to select it.
Š A checkmark appears in the box to the left of the exam name.
Š A checkmark appears next to the category name. This indicates that the category has at least one
exam selected.
Figure A4-5 Selected exams

Š The category and exam name appear in the Selected Protocols list.
4. Press the exam again to de-select it.
Š The category and exam name are removed from the Selected Protocols list.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A4-8
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A4: Image Acquisition

5. Repeat process until all exams are selected for all procedures.
6. Press [ACCEPT] when finished.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Š The Select Protocols screen closes.
Š The Acquisition screen appears.
Š [CLOSE] removes the selections and returns you to the Worklist.
7. Refer to Conduct a Digital Exam (p. A4-9) or Conduct a Cassette Exam (p. A4-10) to continue the
exam.

Conduct a Digital Exam


This section describes the adjustments required when conducting a digital exam.
Follow this process to conduct an exam using the GE Portable DR Detector.
NOTE: If you need to interrupt the exam and resume it at a later time, press the [SUSPEND] button. You
will be returned to the Worklist.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


1. If multiple procedures were selected from the Worklist, select the procedure from the exam drop-
down list.
2. Select the Exam and View to perform from the protocol list.
3. Select the Patient Size. The system default is Medium Adult.
NOTE: To optimize processing for the best image quality, Patient Size should be confirmed for each view.
Available options are:
– Medium Pediatric (toddlers to 5 years old)
– Small Adult
– Medium Adult
– Large Adult

WARNING: It is critical to select the proper patient size on the Acquisition screen. The incorrect Patient
Size may result in an unnecessarily large radiation dose or multiple exposures.
4. Select the GE Portable DR Detector receptor, if necessary.
Figure A4-6 Receptors: GE Portable DR Detector selected

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A4-9
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A4: Image Acquisition

5. Confirm or adjust the Grid and SID based on the recommendations for the protocol.
Š The screen only shows the recommended Grid and SID. The system does not report the current

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Grid and SID status.
6. Make technique adjustments as necessary: kV and mAs.
NOTE: Press [RESET TECHNIQUE] at any time to reset the technique to the default protocol settings.
7. Position the GE Portable DR Detector under the patient.
8. Confirm or adjust the Patient Side, if applicable.
9. Collimate and shield as appropriate for the exam.
10. Have the patient suspend respiration, if required.
11. Make exposure using the hand switch or TechSwitch.
Š The image appears on Image Viewer screen.
NOTE: It takes about 9 seconds for a fully processed image to appear on the Image Viewer screen.
12. Press the Acquisition tab to switch back to the Acquisition screen.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Conduct a Cassette Exam
The Cassette Exam function takes an x-ray without digital image acquisition and storage or electronic
information sending and retrieval. This is for use with a traditional Film Screen or CR cassette.
When the cassette receptor is selected, a message appears near the bottom of the screen: “CAUTION:
Non-digital Exposure. Ensure that film is in place.“

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A4-10
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A4: Image Acquisition

Figure A4-7 Cassette exam Acquisition screen

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
Follow this process to conduct a Cassette Exam.
NOTE: Make sure that the GE Portable DR Detector is in the detector bin before beginning a cassette
exam. Exposures will be inhibited if the detector is placed in the bin after the exam has begun. To
clear the inhibit, either:
– Select a different view and then reselect the view you wish to perform as shown in step 4 be-
low (recommended).
– Remove the detector from the bin for the duration of the exam.
Refer to Chapter 3: Hardware Overview-Unit Features (p. 3-1) for more information about the
detector bin.
1. Press [CASSETTE EXAM] from the bottom of the Worklist screen.
NOTE: Because a cassette exam does not use digital image storage, you do not select procedures from
the Worklist.
Figure A4-8 [CASSETTE EXAM] button on Worklist

Š The Select Protocols screen appears.


2. Select the protocols to perform.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A4-11
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A4: Image Acquisition

3. Press [ACCEPT].
Š The Acquisition screen appears in Cassette Exam mode.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
4. Select the Exam and View to perform from the protocol list.

5. Make technique adjustments as necessary for the appropriate body part being imaged: kV and mAs
NOTE: For film and CR cassette work, use your site’s routine techniques as with any other mobile system.
For ease of use, these techniques can be programmed into the protocol database. Refer to
Chapter A7: Set Preferences-Edit Protocol Database (p. A7-41) for more information.
6. Position the patient with the cassette as appropriate for the exam.
7. Collimate and shield as appropriate for the exam.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


8. Have the patient suspend respiration, if required.
9. Make exposure using the hand-switch.
10. Press [CLOSE] to end the exam.
Š The Worklist appears.
11. Process the cassette as necessary, depending on the media.

Conduct an Emergency Exam


Emergency Exam is a function that allows a patient to be x-rayed without selecting the patient from the
Worklist or adding the patient to the Worklist.
Figure A4-9 Emergency Exam button

Emergency Exam is used in the following situations:


• Medical emergency – The patient needs an x-ray taken immediately.
• No patient information available – There is no patient information to enter due to the patient’s
medical condition. For example, the patient was found unconscious with no identification.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A4-12
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A4: Image Acquisition

When the [EMERGENCY EXAM] button is pressed, the system assigns a unique tracking number as the
Patient Name. The tracking number is the word “NEW” followed by a date and time stamp of the second
the Emergency Exam button was pressed. For example: NEW070422140345. In this example, the number

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
sequence means that the exam was initiated in year 07, month 04, day 22, hour 14, minute 03, and
second 45.
The tracking number is used as the Patient Name on image annotation and as the Patient ID.
NOTE: When the patient information becomes available, images can be copied into the appropriate
Worklist selection. The selection can be populated to the Worklist either by HIS/RIS or manual entry.
Refer to Chapter A6: Image Management-Open Exams and Images (p. A6-9) for more information.
Once initiated, an emergency exam is conducted the same way as any other exam.
Follow this process to conduct an emergency exam.
1. Press [EMERGENCY EXAM] from the bottom left of the Worklist.
Š The Select Protocols screen appears. Refer to Select or Change Protocols (p. A4-7) for more
information.
2. Select the protocols for the exam.
3. Press [ACCEPT].

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Š The Acquisition screen appears.
4. Select the protocol to perform from the Protocol List.
5. Acquire images. Refer to Conduct a Digital Exam (p. A4-9) or Conduct a Cassette Exam (p. A4-10) for
more information.

End Exam
There are several ways to end an exam: Suspend, Close, and Discontinue. Each method is used for a
specific purpose to cover a variety of different situations.
Figure A4-10 Buttons used to end exams

Suspend
Suspend is for situations when you must leave the exam but intend to resume it at a later time.
Suspending an exam does not initiate auto send or auto print functions (if enabled). Images acquired
from a suspended exam do not appear on the Image Management screen. Any acquired images are
stored in a temporary database until they are committed to the permanent storage database upon
closure of the exam.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A4-13
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A4: Image Acquisition

Close
Close is used when the exam is complete; that is, you have acquired all images and do not intend to

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
continue. If enabled, Close sends the images to PACS and initiates auto print and auto send functions.
The images are committed to the permanent storage database and the exam appears on the Image
Management screen. This is the only exam end option available when conducting a cassette exam.

Discontinue
Discontinue an exam when you have opened the procedure but cannot continue the exam. Any images
that were acquired are marked so that they are not used by PACS.
When an exam is discontinued, you must provide the reason for discontinuing the exam. The system
sends the status and reason together to the HIS/RIS.
The available reasons are:

• Doctor cancelled procedure • Patient pregnant


• Equipment failure • Change of procedure for correct charging
• Incorrect procedure ordered • Duplicate order
• Patient allergic to media/contrast • Nursing unit cancel

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


• Patient died • Incorrect side ordered
• Patient refused to continue procedure • Discontinue for unspecified reason
• Patient taken for treatment or surgery • Incorrect worklist selection
• Patient did not arrive

NOTE: The reason for discontinuing an exam cannot be seen on the Worklist or Patient Information. The
information is added to the DICOM header.
Use this procedure to discontinue an exam.
1. Press [DISCONTINUE] from the bottom of the Acquisition screen.
Š A message appears: “Please select a reason for discontinuing this exam.”
2. Select the option that best describes why the exam is being discontinued.
Š Choose “Discontinue for unspecified reason” if no other options describe the current situation.
3. Press [OK].
Š The message closes and the Worklist screen opens.
Š The status of the procedure changes to “Discontinued” on the Worklist.
Š If multiple procedures were selected, the discontinued status applies to all procedures that were
open when the exam was discontinued.
Š Press [CANCEL] to close the message and return to the Acquisition screen.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A4-14
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Chapter A5: Image Viewer

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
The Image Viewer screen (Figure A5-1) appears on the touch panel once an exposure is taken in a live
exam or when an image series is chosen from the Image Management screen for review. This screen is
where images are adjusted and viewed.
Topics covered include:
• Overview (p. A5-1)
• Tool Panel Selection (p. A5-4)
• Select Images to View (p. A5-5)
• Change Image Display (p. A5-6)
• Adjust Images (p. A5-7)
• Annotate and Mask Images (p. A5-9)
– Customize System Annotations (p. A5-12)
– Add Image Annotations (p. A5-13)
– Delete Image Annotations (p. A5-15)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


– Adjust Image Shutter (Crop Image) (p. A5-15)
• Re-process Images (p. A5-17)
• Determine if Images should be Retaken (DEI) (p. A5-18)
• Change Pointer Controls (p. A5-21)
• Apply Quality Check Indicator (Auto Tag) (p. A5-22)
• Print Images (p. A5-22)
• Send Images (p. A5-27)
• Save Changes to Images (p. A5-27)

Overview
The Viewer shows all images in the study. All series within the study are listed and can be seen in the
Viewer.
The left side of the screen contains all the image selection and adjustment tools. Most of the tools are
categorized into panels that can be selected to reveal different functions.
The majority of the screen (Figure A5-1) is devoted to image display. The images on the right side of the
screen update as adjustments are made. You are able to view single or multiple images at once. When
viewing multiple images, an aqua border identifies the currently selected image.
Table A5-1 describes the functions for the Image Viewer screen.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-1
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Figure A5-1 Image Viewer screen

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
Table A5-1 Image Viewer screen functions

Function Description

patient Identification Identifies the Patient Name and Patient ID as entered on the
Patient Information screen.

screen switch tab If in an active exam, allows you to switch back to the Acquisition
screen. If viewing images from a completed exam, the
Acquisition screen tab is disabled.
NOTE: When acquiring multiple images or if you need to retake
an image, you must switch back to the Acquisition screen
in order to record the exposure.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-2
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Function Description

tool selection list Switches between different tool panels that allow you to change

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
the image display or manipulate the image.
Available options are:
• Images – Processed: Shows small previews of all processed
images in the selected series and highlights the images
currently shown in the Viewer. The images are categorized by
exam and series. Refer to Select Images to View (p. A5-5).
• Images – Raw: Shows small previews of all raw images in the
selected series and highlights the images currently shown in
the viewer. The images are categorized by exam and series.
Refer to Select Images to View (p. A5-5).
• Format/Zoom: Controls how many images appear in the
Image Viewer screen at one time and adjusts the
magnification of each image. Refer to Change Image Display
(p. A5-6).
• Image Display Tools: Contains the tools to flip, rotate, adjust
brightness, adjust contrast, invert, and apply windowing to
images. Refer to Adjust Images (p. A5-7).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


• Annotations/Mask: Contains the tools to annotate and crop
images. Refer to Annotate and Mask Images (p. A5-9).
• Reprocessing: Changes the processing settings. Refer to Re-
process Images (p. A5-17).
• Print: Controls the printing of images. Refer to Print Images
(p. A5-22).

DEI (Detector Exposure Index) If enabled, displays the dose received by the detector and
whether the dose is within an acceptable range for the
anatomy.
You may need to re-take images that show doses below the
acceptable range. Refer to Determine if Images should be
Retaken (DEI) (p. A5-18) for more information.
NOTE: Depending on your system’s configuration, the DEI may
only show a numerical value. Refer to Chapter A7: Set
Preferences-Image Viewer (p. A7-25) to configure the
Detector Exposure Index.

pointer controls Changes the action of the pointer when pressed and dragged
on the image.
Refer to Change Pointer Controls (p. A5-21) for more
information.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-3
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Function Description

[CLOSE] Closes the Image Viewer screen and prompts you to save any

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
changes to images.
Close also initiates auto print and auto push, if enabled.
Refer to Save Changes to Images (p. A5-27) for more
information.

network connection status Appears when the Definium AMX 700 is connected to the
hospital network.

wireless network connection If the wireless network connection is enabled, displays the
status status of the connection and signal strength. Refer to
Chapter A2: General Information-Wireless Network Connection
(p. A2-7) for more information.

image database size Shows how many images are currently saved to the local
database and approximately how many more images the
database can accommodate.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


system status Displays the last system status message.
NOTE: To clear the system status area, open the Message Log
and close it again.
Refer to Chapter A2: General Information-System Status and
Messages (p. A2-10) for more information.

[MESSAGE LOG] Brings up the message log since the last system re-start.
Refer to Chapter A2: General Information-System Status and
Messages (p. A2-10) for more information.

[QAP] When the yellow alert icon is present, indicates that QAP should
be performed to ensure continued image quality.
NOTE: QAP cannot be performed when the Image Acquisition or
Image Viewer screens are displayed. End the exam or
close the images before attempting to perform QAP.
Refer to Chapter A8: Quality Assurance Process and
Maintenance for more information.

Tool Panel Selection


Different tools and controls are accessed through the Tool Selection list. Press the down-arrow to see a
list of all choices.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-4
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

The following sections describe the tools and their functions.


Figure A5-2 Tool selection list

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Select Images to View
The Images - Raw and Images - Processed panels (Figure A5-3) allow you to select images to view. Both
the Raw and Processed panels function the same way. The difference is that the Raw panel shows
images as they were acquired and the Processed panel shows images that have been processed.
NOTE: When viewing or adjusting images from a completed exam, always work with processed images.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


The top half of the tool panel shows the different exams and series that are available. When you select a
series, previews (or “thumbnails”) of all the images within that series appear in the lower half of the panel.
The panel shows up to 8 image previews at a time. If there are more than 8 images in the series, a
scrollbar appears on the right to allow you to see the rest of the images.
The image that is currently selected in the Image Viewer is shown with an orange border and a white dot
in the upper right corner.
To view an image, press an image preview.
Figure A5-3 Images – Processed panel

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-5
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Change Image Display


The Format/Zoom panel (Figure A5-4) controls how many images appear in the Image Viewer screen at

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
one time and adjusts the magnification of each image.
The Zoom buttons change the size of the selected image shown in the Viewer. Table A5-2 describes the
Zoom options.
The Display Format buttons allow you to view up to 9 images at one time.
Figure A5-4 Format / Zoom panel

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Table A5-2 Zoom tool descriptions

Tool Description

Zoom One Shows default the image size where one pixel on the detector equals one
pixel on the screen.

Zoom Half Reduces the image to 50% (four pixels on the detector equals one pixel
on screen).

Fit To Scales the image to fit within the Image Viewer screen.
Screen

True Size Shows the image in the exact size it was acquired from the detector (one
centimeter on the detector equals one centimeter on screen).

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-6
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Adjust Images
The Image Display Tools panel (Figure A5-5) contains the tools to flip, rotate, adjust brightness, adjust

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
contrast, invert, and apply windowing to the selected image. Table A5-3 describes each tool and how it
functions.
Figure A5-5 Image Display Tools panel

Table A5-3 Image Display Tools descriptions

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Tool Description

Contrast Adjusts the differences between dark and light on the selected
image.
• Move the slider right for more contrast (towards pure black
and white).
• Move the slider left for less contrast (towards uniform gray).

Brightness Lightens or darkens the selected image.


• Move the slider right for a lighter image.
• Move the slider left for a darker image.

Invert Reverses light and dark areas of the selected image.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-7
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Tool Description

Windowing Applies windowing to the selected image.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Available options are:
• Normal - image as acquired
• Hard - adjusts the image towards black and white
• Soft - adjusts the image towards gray
The GE Portable DR Detectoruses a “Smart Windowing”
algorithm to optimize image quality. Smart Windowing is an
automated, image-based, and technique-independent
method of selecting brightness and contrast for image display.
Earlier methods mostly relied on technique information (kVp,
dose level, etc.) to set brightness/contrast, making them more
prone to operator and system errors.

Vertical Flip Flips the selected image 180 degrees on the horizontal axis;
that is, switches top for bottom.

Horizontal Flip Flips the selected image 180 degrees on the vertical axis; that

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


is, switches left for right.

Rotate Left Rotates the selected image counter-clockwise in 90 degree


increments.

Rotate Right Rotates the selected image clockwise in 90 degree increments.

Free Rotation Rotates the selected image both clockwise and counter-
clockwise. The range is -180° to 180°.
• Press the end buttons to rotate the image in 0.1 degree
increments.
• Press and drag the slider to spin the image.
• Move the slider right to rotate the image clockwise.
• Move the slider left to rotate the image counter-clockwise.

Restore Image Removes all adjustments and returns the selected image to its
original state.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-8
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Annotate and Mask Images


The Annotations/Mask panel (Figure A5-6) contains the tools to annotate images. Table A5-4 describes

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
the tools and their functions.
Image annotations are divided into two categories:
• Image annotation – Lines, ellipses, Cobb angle, user annotation (notes), and RL markers added by the
operator to measure or bring attention to a section of the image. You draw or place these
annotations on the image as appropriate. Refer to Add Image Annotations (p. A5-13) for more
information.
• System annotation – Information that is kept by the system, such as identifying information,
exposure and acquisition information, and processing information. These annotations are displayed
as text at the corners of the image. You may select which annotations appear, but you cannot control
where the annotations are placed.
Figure A5-6 Annotations/Mask panel

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Table A5-4 Annotations/Mask tool descriptions

Tool Description

Line Places a line on the image that you may re-size, move, or angle. Line
specifications are shown in the User Measurements annotation at the
bottom right corner of the image.

Ellipse Places an ellipse (circle or oval) on the image that you may re-size, move,
or re-shape. Ellipse specifications are shown in the User Measurements
annotation at the bottom right corner of the image.

Cobb Places a Cobb angle (two lines) on the image that you may re-size, move,
or angle. Cobb angle specifications are shown in the User Measurements
annotation at the bottom right corner of the image.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-9
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Tool Description

User Places a text box on the image that you may add notes into.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Annotation

Hide and Temporarily removes image annotations from the image. When
Show annotations are hidden, the button name changes to [SHOW]. Press
[SHOW] to see the annotations.

Erase Deletes the selected image annotation.


NOTE: Deleted annotations cannot be recovered.

Erase All Deletes all image annotations.


NOTE: Deleted annotations cannot be recovered.

RL Places a Right or Left marker on the image for reference.


NOTE: RL markers are only available when the image is open in a live exam.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Only one marker may be placed on an image.

Edit Opens a dialog box to edit or change the selected User Annotation
(notes).

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-10
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Tool Description

Full Places all available system annotation on the image.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
• Patient information (top left corner) exam date and patient
identification
• Study information (top left corner) exam identification
• Series information (top left corner) series identification
• Image information (top left corner) image identification
• Acquisition information (top right corner) dose
• Hospital information (top right corner) the name of the facility where
the image was acquired
• X-ray parameters (top right corner) the mA, kVp, ms, mAs, and DEI of
the exposure
• Anatomy information (bottom left corner) the protocol used to acquire
the image
• Processing information (bottom left corner) the look used to process
the image
• User measurements (bottom right corner) size and angle
measurements for line, ellipse, and Cobb annotations

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Display parameters (bottom right corner) the size of the image and the
zoom

Partial Displays ONLY the facility name, dose information and technical factors.

None Removes all system annotations from the image. System annotations can
be re-applied by pressing [FULL], [PARTIAL], or [CUSTOM].

Custom Brings up a screen (Figure A5-7) that allows you to choose which system
annotations appear. Refer to Customize System Annotations (p. A5-12).

Manual Manually adjusts the image shutter.


Shutter Collimation is detected using image-based processing. In some cases, the
FOV detected by the system does not match the actual exposed FOV. Use
the Manual Shutter tool to correct this.
NOTE: This function is only available when the image is open in a live exam
or for re-processed images.
Refer to Adjust Image Shutter (Crop Image) (p. A5-15) for more information.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-11
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Customize System Annotations


Follow this process to customize the system annotations that appear on the image.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
1. Select the Annotations/Mask panel, if necessary.
2. Press [CUSTOM].
Š The Annotation screen (Figure A5-7) appears.
Figure A5-7 Custom Annotation selections

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


3. Select (check) the annotations you want to appear.
4. Adjust the Font Size, if necessary.
Š The available font sizes are:
– -2 (smallest)
– -1
– N (normal)
– +1
– +2
– +3 (largest)
5. Press [OK].
Š [CANCEL] closes the screen and leaves the selections unchanged.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-12
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Add Image Annotations


NOTE: All image annotations initially appear in the same place (center of image) and are the same shape,

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
size, and/or angle. It is possible to have multiple annotations of the same kind stacked on top of
each other.
Follow this process to add image annotations.
1. Select the image to annotate, if necessary.
2. Press the button of the annotation to insert.
NOTE: Selected image annotations are yellow with red handles. Unselected image annotations are aqua
without handles.
3. Move, re-size, or change the angle of the annotation as described in Table A5-5.
NOTE: When resizing annotations, make sure that the pointer arrow is inside the square handle and has
changed to a “+” sign (Figure A5-8) before trying to move the handle.
Figure A5-8 Active annotation handle

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Table A5-5 Image annotation instructions

Tool Instructions

Line Select the line.


• To move: Press and drag the middle of the line.
• To change the angle: Press and drag one of the square handles
at the ends of the line.
• To resize: Press and drag one of the square handles at the ends
of the line.

Ellipse Select the ellipse.


• To move: Press and drag the ellipse by its edge (not on a handle).
• To change shape or re-size: Press and drag a square handle.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-13
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Tool Instructions

Cobb Select the Cobb.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
• To move: Press and drag the middle of a line.
• To change the angle: Press and drag one of the square handles
at the ends of the line.
• To resize: Press and drag one of the square handles at the ends
of the line.

User Select User Annotation from the Image Tools palette.


Annotation Select an annotation from the list or click in the “CUSTOM” text
area of the Text Annotation screen.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Type your comment.
Press [OK].
• To move: Press and drag by the red square on the top left corner
of the text box.
• To edit: Double-tap (two touches in quick succession) the User
Annotation. Make your changes on the Text Annotation screen.
Refer to Chapter A7: Set Preferences-Preset Names (p. A7-15) for
more information about configuring the pre-set annotation list.

RL Marker Select the RL marker.


• To move: Select the marker and drag to the desired area.
• To switch between R and L: Press the RL button.
NOTE: Only one RL marker is inserted per image.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-14
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Delete Image Annotations


Follow this process to remove image annotations.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
NOTE: It is not possible to recover deleted annotations.
1. Select the annotation.
2. Press [ERASE] or [ERASE ALL].
Š If [ERASE ALL] was pressed, a message appears: “Would you like to remove all annotations from
the selected image?”
3. Press [YES].
Š All annotations are removed.

Adjust Image Shutter (Crop Image)


The system has the ability to detect the collimated edges of the image and may apply shutters to mask
the collimated areas. Refer to Automatic Shutter (p. A5-16) for more information.
The Manual Shutter function allows you adjust the automatically applied (default) shutter for viewing and
printing.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


You can only adjust the shutter of images in an active exam or of re-processed images.
NOTE: To view hidden areas of the image, use the Manual Shutter and drag the red corner handles to the
edges of the image.
Follow this process to adjust the shutter of an image.
1. Select the image.
Figure A5-9 Image before adjusting shutter

2. Click [MANUAL SHUTTER].


Š The image will be shown in reduced size so that you are able to see the edges (Figure A5-10).
Š The shutter appears as a yellow box with red handles (Figure A5-11). Anything outside of the box
will be blacked out when the shutter is applied.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-15
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Figure A5-10 Editing the manual shutter

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Figure A5-11 Close up of manual shutter

3. Click and drag the red corner handles to the desired shape and size.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


NOTE: Any image annotations (line, Cobb, ellipse, R/L marker) that are outside of the visible image area
will be lost when the exam is closed. Make sure that annotations are within the active image area.
Manual shutters do not effect system annotations.
4. Click [MANUAL SHUTTER] to apply the adjustment.
Š If the image does not return to its selected size, click the Zoom buttons on the Viewer Display
panel to re-select the viewing size. Refer to Change Image Display (p. A5-6) for more information.
Figure A5-12 Image after adjusting shutter

5. Click [MANUAL SHUTTER] again to edit.


Automatic Shutter
The Intelligent Collimator Edge Detection (ICED) algorithm relies solely on image information in order to
locate any collimation edges present in an x-ray radiograph. This allows the system to provide a
shuttered image on the viewer regardless of where the collimated image edges lie on the detector.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-16
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

In the event of incorrect automatic shuttering, the image can be recovered by manually re-shuttering the
image to visualize the desired anatomy and then re-processing with the same look.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Re-process Images
Image re-processing allows the system to extract more information from an already acquired image by
changing the processing settings instead of taking additional exposures.
Re-processing can be performed on any image that has a corresponding raw data set. Images can be re-
processed both in live exams and in review mode.
Re-processing creates a new image in the “PROCESSED” series.
NOTE: When closing an exam or closing patient in review mode, you must select to save changes to
images or the re-processed images will not remain in the series. Refer to Save Changes to Images
(p. A5-27) for more information.
The initial image processing is determined by the default that is configured for the protocol. Refer to
Chapter A7: Set Preferences-Image Processing (p. A7-31) for more information.
Table A5-6 describes the settings used to re-process an image.
Figure A5-13 Reprocessing panel

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Table A5-6 Reprocessing tool descriptions

Function Description

Anatomy Changes the anatomical region.

View Changes the view.

Image Type Displays the image type of the acquisition.


Images cannot be re-processed with a different image type than originally
acquired.

Patient size Changes the patient size.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-17
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Function Description

Look Changes the processing look.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Looks are the way an image is processed to be viewed by a radiologist for
interpretation.
Looks are pre-defined combinations of brightness, contrast, edge enhancement,
and tissue equalization.
Factory Look descriptions:
• Factory Look 1 – similar to analog film, low edge, no TE
• Factory Look 2 – low CR look, low edge, moderate tissue contrast
• Factory Look 3 – moderate CR look, low edge, TE
• Factory Look 4 – highly digital look, high edge, high TE
• Custom looks – The system allows you to build up to 5 custom looks in any
combination of parameters. Refer to Chapter A7: Set Preferences-Image
Processing (p. A7-31) for more information on building custom looks.

[REPROCESS] Applies the changes and re-processes the image.


Re-processing creates a new image in the series.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


NOTE: The button does not become enabled until the Look is selected.

[EDIT PROC] Brings up a screen that allows you to view the Factory look settings or create
custom looks.
Refer to Chapter A7: Set Preferences-Image Processing (p. A7-31) for more
information about building custom looks.

Determine if Images should be Retaken (DEI)


The Detector Exposure Index (DEI) provides a visual indicator to the user for the amount of exposure
received by the detector for a given image. It is designed as a tool for the user to be able to obtain a
properly exposed image by altering acquisition parameters in the event of a retake. DEI estimates the
dose that has reached the detector and compares it to the expected dose for the anatomy to indicate if
the image is under- or over-exposed.
With film cassettes, exposure is directly related to the resulting image; films that are under-exposed or
over-exposed will be either too light or too dark. With the DR Detector, dynamic range detection
algorithms compensate for exposure errors to create images with acceptable brightness and contrast.
Because there is no visible relationship between the actual exposure and the image quality, DEI is used to
identify and track under- and over-exposure.
The DEI acceptable range varies by anatomy. For example, a chest PA exposure may result in a DEI of 0.6
while a hand exposure may result in a DEI value of 1.0.
The display of the Detector Exposure Index and the DEI ranges are configured from the Image Viewer
preferences screen. Refer to Chapter A7: Set Preferences-DEI (Detector Exposure Index) (p. A7-28) for
more information.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-18
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Figure A5-14 DEI graphical display


1. Acceptable DEI range (upper and lower limit)

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
2. Current DEI for the selected image

Figure A5-15 Examples of graphical DEI displays


First segment (left) colored orange
Low DEI = Image under-exposed

Center segment colored green


Acceptable DEI = Image correctly exposed

Last segment (right) colored orange

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


High DEI = Image over-exposed

For each acquired image, the system provides 3 estimated values:


• Uncompensated Detector Exposure (UDExp): Estimated exposure (µGy) to the detector behind the
patient anatomy with an assumed technique of 80 kV with no anti-scatter grid. This information is
stored in the DICOM header.
• Compensated Detector Exposure (CDExp): Estimated exposure (µGy) to the detector behind the
patient anatomy with the actual kV and use of anti-scatter grid. This information is stored in the
DICOM header.
• Detector Exposure Index (DEI): A relative measure of exposure to the detector, as compared to the
expected exposure for a particular anatomical view. It is a visual indicator on the viewer display.
DEI compensates for the speed setting of the system. For example, if an exposure is taken of an object at
a speed setting of 400 and the resultant DEI was 1.72, then an exposure taken of the same object
(assuming identical technique and positioning) after setting the speed to 200 will also give a DEI of 1.72.
NOTE: A higher DEI indicates a higher exposure to the detector. It should not be confused with system
“speed” which decreases as the exposure increases.
Default DEI lower and upper limits are provided as preliminary guidelines. These guidelines should not be
taken as strict requirements of retakes/re-exposures. DEI read-outs are reference guides to help the
technologist determine that if a re-acquisition of an image is necessary, the indicator can help the user
determine appropriate technique adjustments to provide adequate exposure to the detector.
The specific limits and retake rules should be ultimately determined by the appropriate staff at your
facility.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-19
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Corrective Actions
Do the following if both the DEI value is outside of the acceptable range and the image quality is poor:

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
• Low DEI - increase the mAs and kV values. Increase mAs by increments of 2 Renard steps and check
that kVp range is anatomically appropriate.
• High DEI - decrease the mAs and kV values. Decrease mAs by increments of 2 Renard steps and
check that kVp range is anatomically appropriate.
NOTE: A 2-Renard step adjustment is equivalent to a 25% change. The amount of change will depend on
how high or low the DEI reading is. If the DEI is twice the recommended range, then the initial
adjustment should be to cut the mAs in half in order to create a noticeable change in the mAs
delivered to the detector and thus change in the DEI readout in subsequent exposures.
If DEI is within the acceptable range but the image quality is still poor, the image may need adjustment
through looks customization. Refer to Re-process Images (p. A5-17) to correct individual images or
Chapter A7: Set Preferences-Image Processing (p. A7-31) to change the default processing for exams and
views.
NOTE: Call for service if the system continues to show low or high DEI. Recurring DEI errors may indicate
that the system needs calibration or repair.
Exceptions to Corrective Actions

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


The following conditions may achieve a properly exposed image but still result in a low DEI. These should
be treated as special cases and the standard retake and corrective action rules may not apply.
• The presence of external patient shielding (i.e., lead apron) in the field of view can result in an
unexpectedly low DEI (and UDExp/CDExp). The presence of shielding can be easily confirmed by
viewing the image.
• The incorrect determination of the FOV by the system can result in an unexpectedly low DEI (and
UDExp/CDExp). The presence of significant collimation regions in the final image can be easily
confirmed by viewing the image. Correcting the FOV using the Manual Shutter feature does NOT
correct the DEI value.
NOTE: User must select the appropriate FOV for the anatomy imaged, and use proper collimation at all
times.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-20
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Change Pointer Controls


The pointer control buttons (Figure A5-16) change the action of the pointer when it is pressed and

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
dragged on an image.
Figure A5-16 Pointer control buttons

The pointer controls allow you to perform other functions that are not available in any other tool panel.
Follow this process to change the pointer controls. Table A5-7 describes the action of each control.
1. Select the image to act upon, if necessary.
2. Press the pointer control to use.
3. Press and drag the pointer on the selected image.
Table A5-7 Pointer Controls description

Tool Description

Select Image When viewing multiple images, selects the image to act upon. This is

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


the default pointer behavior.

Pan Image Moves the image within the viewing area.

Image Shows a small part of the image at 3 times magnification.


Magnifying
Glass

Change Image Changes the brightness and contrast by dragging the pointer instead
Brightness / of using the Image Display Tools controls.
Contrast • Contrast: Press and drag the pointer vertically. Up is more contrast,
down is less contrast.
• Brightness: Press and drag the pointer horizontally. Right is brighter,
left is darker
Moving the pointer diagonally will change both brightness and contrast
in proportion to the angle of movement. That is, if you move the pointer
at a perfect 45° angle, brightness and contrast will change equally;
however, if you move the pointer at a 20° angle (more horizontally) the
brightness will change more than the contrast.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-21
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Apply Quality Check Indicator (Auto Tag)


If Auto Tag is enabled, the quality check symbol indicates that an image is of acceptable quality and

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
allows the image to be auto printed and auto pushed (if enabled). Refer to Chapter A7: Set Preferences-
Auto Tag (Quality Check) (p. A7-19) to enable Auto Tag.
The quality check indicator is a “T” that appears in a white box at the bottom right corner of the image
(Figure A5-17). The quality check indicator is on by default. Removing the indicator means that the image
is not acceptable and will not be auto printed or auto pushed and will remain on the local database only.
NOTE: The quality check indicator is only available in live exams.
• To remove the quality check indicator, press the white box so that the “T” disappears.
• To restore the quality check indicator, press the white box so that the “T” reappears.
Figure A5-17 Quality check indicator

Print Images

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Images can be printed from the system in two ways: Manual Print and Auto Print.

Auto Print
The system can be configured to perform an automatic print upon closure of the exam. Preferences are
accessed from the Utilities screen. Refer to Chapter A7: Set Preferences-Auto Print (p. A7-19) for
information on configuring Auto Print.
For mobile units, printing will begin the next time the unit is connected to the network.

Manual Print
Film Manager and Manual Print allow you to print images on demand.
Mobile units must be connected to the network to be able to print.
• Film Manager allows configuration and printing of multiple images in a series.
• Manual Print allows configuration and printing of the currently selected image.
Figure A5-18 Print panel

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-22
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Print Multiple Images


Follow this process to print multiple images.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
1. Press [FILM MANGER].
Š The Film Composer screen (Figure A5-19) appears.
Figure A5-19 Film Composer screen - before and after images are added

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


2. Select the number of images you want to appear on a sheet.
Š If there are more images in the series than will fit on the sheet, use the Sheet [] and [] buttons
to configure the printing options for each sheet.
NOTE: You are able to change the number of images for each sheet individually; however, changing the
format will remove any images that already exist on the sheet.
3. Drag the image thumbnails from the Images - Raw or Images - Processed panel (Figure A5-20) to the
Film Composer screen.
Figure A5-20 Images - Processed panel

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-23
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

4. Use the buttons to confirm and adjust the print settings.


Š Press [PREVIEW] to see how the images are positioned on the sheet.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Š Press [CLEAR SHEET] to remove images from the currently displayed sheet.
Š Press [CLEAR ALL] to remove images from all sheets.
Š Press [PRINT SHEET] to print the currently displayed sheet.
Š Press [PRINT ALL] to print all sheets.
5. Press [PRINTER SETTINGS] to confirm or adjust the printer configuration. (Refer to Figure A5-22 and
Table A5-8 for more information.)
6. Press [CLOSE] when finished.
Print Current Image
Follow this process to print a single image.
1. Select the image from the Images tool palette, if necessary.
2. Press [MANUAL PRINT].
Š The Print Images screen appears.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


3. Adjust the settings as indicated in Table A5-8.
4. Press [PREVIEW] to confirm that the image placement is correct.
Š If the image placement is incorrect (as shown in Figure A5-21), press [CANCEL] to return to the
Print Images screen and adjust the settings.
Š If the image placement is acceptable, press [PRINT] to print the image.
Figure A5-21 Example of Print Preview with incorrect settings

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-24
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

5. Press [PRINT] to print the image.


Š [CANCEL] closes the Print Images screen without printing and returns you to the Image Viewer

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
screen.
Figure A5-22 Print Images screen

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Table A5-8 Print Images field description

Field Description

Printer Lists all available printers configured for your system.

Orientation Selects vertical or horizontal orientation of the image on film or paper.


Available options are:
• Landscape
• Portrait

Print Mode Selects what size to print the image.


Available options are:
• True Size
• Fit to Film
• Reduce Size
• Orthopedic Magnification (if enabled)

Magnification If Reduce Size is selected as the Print Mode, allows you to enter the percent by
which the image will be reduced. The accepted range is between 40% and 90%.
If True Size or Fit to Film are selected as the Print Mode, the text box remains
disabled.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-25
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Field Description

Format Selects the print format.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Available options are:
• Standard
• 35 mm
• 40 mm

Media Size Shows the available sizes that are configured for the selected printer.

# of Copies Defines how many copies to print.

Media Type Selects the type of media to print on.


Available options are:
• Paper
• Clear film
• Blue film

Destination Selects the destination.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Available options are:
• Processor
• Magazine

Magnification Selects the magnification type.


Type Available options are:
• Cubic
• None

Annotation Selects the amount of annotation to print on the image.


Available options are:
• Full
• Partial
• Custom
• None
Refer to Annotate and Mask Images (p. A5-9) for more information.

[EDIT] If Custom Annotation was selected, brings up a screen that allows you to choose
the annotation to print on the image.
Refer to Annotate and Mask Images (p. A5-9) for more information.

[PREVIEW] Shows how the image will appear on the film or paper with the current settings.

[PRINT] Prints the image.

[CANCEL] Cancels printing.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-26
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A5: Image Viewer

Send Images
If Auto Send is enabled, acquired images are automatically sent to a pre-determined location on exam

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
close. Refer to Chapter A7: Set Preferences-Auto Send (Auto Push) (p. A7-22) for information on
configuring Auto Send.
For mobile units, Auto Send will begin the next time the unit is connected to the network.

Save Changes to Images


You have the option to save or discard the changes you have made to images when you close the Image
Viewer screen or end the exam.
1. If in a live exam, press [CLOSE] on the Acquisition screen.
2. If in review mode, press [CLOSE] on the Image Viewer screen.
Š A message appears: “Would you like to save the changes made to the images?”
3. Press [YES].
Š [NO] closes the Image Viewer screen without saving changes.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A5-27
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A6: Image Management

Chapter A6: Image Management

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
The Image Management screen (Figure A6-1) shows all the images stored in the selected database
source. This screen is used to manage images, copy images to exams, transfer images to network hosts,
or save images on CD.
Topics covered include:
• Overview (p. A6-1)
• View Patient Information (p. A6-7)
• Load Images from a CD (p. A6-7)
• Synchronize to HIS or RIS or PACS (p. A6-8)
• Search List (p. A6-8)
• Open Exams and Images (p. A6-9)
• Copy Exams and Images (p. A6-9)
– Copy Exams to a Network Host (p. A6-9)
– Copy Images to Another Exam (p. A6-10)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


– Copy Exams to a CD (p. A6-12)
• Delete Exams, Series, or Images (p. A6-13)
– Lock Exams from Deletion (p. A6-14)
• Make Exam Anonymous (De-Identify) (p. A6-14)

Overview
The majority of the Image Management screen is devoted to the exam list. Images are organized by
exam. Each exam is a row. If multiple exams were acquired in the same session, each exam has its own
row on the list. The exam expands to show the series.
Within each exam are “series” of images. A series is a collection of one or more images acquired in a
session. Each protocol is a series. A new series is created when a completed exam is appended.
There are two types of image series: raw and processed. Raw images are the exact images that were
acquired. Processed images are the raw images with specific processing and image adjustments (such
as brightness and contrast) applied. It is possible to create several processed images from one raw
image.
Individual images reside within the series. Pressing a series or pressing the [+] button opens the image
details section of the Image Management screen. In the Image Details section, each row is an image.
Selecting a row makes a small preview image, or “thumbnail,” appear. The image may be opened for
viewing, adjustment, or deletion.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A6-1
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A6: Image Management

Selecting multiple exams on the Image Management screen is different than on the Worklist. The Image
Management screen allows you to select exams that do not have the same Patient ID or Patient Name.
To select multiple exams, press the [SELECT MULTIPLE] button, then select the exams. The [SELECT

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
MULTIPLE] button will remain engaged until an action (such as Copy Exam or Transfer) is completed, then
the button will automatically disengage.
Figure A6-1 Image Management screen
1. Selected
exam
2. Series in
exam
3. Image
detail
button
4. Images in
selected
series
5. Preview of
selected

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


image

Table A6-1 Image Management screen functions

Function Description

navigation bar Allows you to change between the Worklist, Image Management,
and Utilities screens or allows you to logoff the system (if applicable).
The darker color indicates which screen is currently displayed. The
individual buttons are described below.

[WORKLIST] Opens the Worklist screen where patient procedures may be added
to the schedule and exams started.
Refer to Chapter A3: Worklist for more information.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A6-2
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A6: Image Management

Function Description

[IMAGE MANAGEMENT] Opens the Image Management screen where images may be

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
selected for viewing or be copied to other exams.

[UTILITIES] Opens a screen where system settings (such as Network and Printer
connections) and preferences may be changed. If the Login function
is enabled, the preferences you are allowed to change will vary
depending on your level of access.
Refer to Chapter A7: Set Preferences for more information.

[LOG OFF] If the Login function is enabled, pressing this button logs the current
user off of the system.
Refer to Chapter A2: General Information-Login and Log off (p. A2-5)
for more information.

[SELECT MULTIPLE] Allows systems with touch screens to select multiple exams to
transfer, copy to CD, or delete.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


NOTE: This button only allows the selection of multiple exams and
images, not series.

CAUTION: If both exam and images are selected, the exam will be
deleted upon confirmation.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A6-3
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A6: Image Management

Function Description

Image Tools Performs various functions on selected exams. Available options are:

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
• Copy Exam – Allows all exam images for a patient to be copied to
another patient, to another location, or to CD. Refer to Copy Exams
and Images (p. A6-9) for more information.
• De-identify – Makes the exam anonymous (removes all patient
identifying information, including Name, ID, and accession
number). Refer to Make Exam Anonymous (De-Identify) (p. A6-14)
for more information.
• SMPTE – Allows services personnel to access the SMPTE pattern for
system calibration.
• CBT – If available, launches Computer Based Training for the
system. If Computer Based Training is not available, the option is
disabled (“grayed out”).
• PACS Test Images – Loads a set of calibration images that are used
to test the quality of images sent to PACS or printers.
• TG18 Samples – Loads a set of test images that are used to
calibrate the display monitor.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


NOTE: It is not expected that you will need to access the SMPTE pattern
or test images during the course of normal work. Test images
are used to calibrate the system or to determine the cause of
image quality problems.

source locations Selects the source of images to view (e.g., the local unit or a CD).
Refer to Open Exams and Images (p. A6-9) for more information.

[PATIENT INFORMATION] Shows the Patient Information screen for the selected procedure.
NOTE: Patient Information cannot be edited once an exam has
started.
Refer to Chapter A3: Worklist-Add / Edit Patient Information (p. A3-15)
for more information.

Search by Searches for exams by sorting the selected the column (shown in the
drop-down list) and searches for text entered into the text box.
Refer to Search List (p. A6-8) for more information.

[LOCK] or [UNLOCK] Locks the selected exams from deletion. If a locked exam is selected,
the button name changes to [UNLOCK].
[UNLOCK] removes the lock from the selected exams.
Refer to Lock Exams from Deletion (p. A6-14) for more information.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A6-4
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A6: Image Management

Function Description

Exam, series, and images list Lists the images saved in the local database categorized by exams

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
and series. The following information is displayed:
• Exams - the exams saved in the local database
• Series detail - the series for the selected exam
• Image list - the images for the selected series
• Image preview - a representative thumbnail of the selected image.
Figure A6-1 shows how the information is organized.

Destination Selects where images are to be copied or saved. The first button
switches between the local unit and any configured network hosts.
NOTE: If the GE Portable DR Detector is used in a mobile unit, network
hosts will only be available when the unit is connected to the
network.
NOTE: For mobile units, the [CD1] button is only available if the unit’s
external CD drive is connected.
Refer to Copy Exams and Images (p. A6-9) for more information.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


[DELETE] Deletes the selected exams, series, or images from the local
database.
Refer to Delete Exams, Series, or Images (p. A6-13) for more
information.

[VIEWER] Opens the Image Viewer screen and shows the images in the
selected series. Images may be adjusted on the Image Viewer screen.
Refer to Chapter A5: Image Viewer for more information.

network connection status Appears when the Definium AMX 700is connected to the hospital
network.

wireless network connection If the wireless network connection is enabled, displays the status of
status the connection and signal strength. Refer to Chapter A2: General
Information-Wireless Network Connection (p. A2-7) for more
information.

[TRANSFER LOG] Shows a list of transferred exams and their destinations.


Refer to Copy Exams and Images (p. A6-9) for more information.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A6-5
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A6: Image Management

Function Description

database size Shows how many images are currently saved to the local database

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
and approximately how many more images the database is able to
accommodate.
Refer to the following sections for more information:
• Copy Exams and Images (p. A6-9) to save images to another
database or disk
• Delete Exams, Series, or Images (p. A6-13) to remove images

system status Displays the last system status message.


Refer to Chapter A2: General Information-System Status and
Messages (p. A2-10) for more information.

[MESSAGE LOG] Displays the message log since the last system re-start.
Refer to Chapter A2: General Information-System Status and
Messages (p. A2-10) for more information.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A6-6
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A6: Image Management

View Patient Information


When accessed from the Image Management screen, the Patient Information screen displays exam

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
information about the acquired images in the lower left corner (Figure A6-2). All other patient information
is as described in Chapter A3: Worklist-Add / Edit Patient Information (p. A3-15).
Figure A6-2 Patient Information from Image Management screen

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Load Images from a CD
Follow this process to access images stored on a CD.
1. Connect the external CD R/W drive to the unit.
2. Insert the CD with images into the CD drive.
3. Press Source [CD1].
Š The exam list updates to show the images stored on the CD.
4. Select the exams.
5. Copy the exams to the Local database. Refer to Copy Exams and Images (p. A6-9) for more
information.
6. Click the [LOCAL] Destination button.
Š A message appears: “Selected images will be copied to (destination name). Select OK to confirm.“
7. Click [OK].
8. Open the exams from the Local database.
NOTE: If the exams are being viewed on a computer that has the DICOM viewer installed, images may be
viewed directly from the CD.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A6-7
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A6: Image Management

Synchronize to HIS or RIS or PACS


Upon connection to the network, the system will:

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
• automatically connect to PACS and auto send images (if auto send is enabled)
• automatically connect to printers and print images queued for auto print (if auto print is enabled)
Refer Chapter A7: Set Preferences-Network Connections (p. A7-2) for more information about configuring
network and printer connections.

To update the Worklist with HIS or RIS data, press the [REFRESH] button. Refer to Chapter A3: Worklist-
Refresh (p. A3-11) for more information.

Search List
The Search feature finds procedures by column.
Figure A6-3 Search by column drop-down list

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


1. Press the button on the Search By drop-down list to select the column you want to search.
Š If the column you want is already selected, begin at step 3.
2. Select the column. For example, Patient ID.
Š The list automatically sorts the selected column.
3. Type the search criteria into the text box. For example, you are looking for patients whose names
begin with “J”, so you would type “j” into the text box.
NOTE: The text box is not case sensitive.
4. Continue typing the search criteria.
Š The list automatically selects the first procedure that matches what you have typed into the text
box.
Š If no procedures match what you have typed, the list de-selects all procedures and places the
closest match at the top of the exam list.

Sort by Column
Sorting allows you to organize the procedures by the column of your choice.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A6-8
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A6: Image Management

1. Press on the column heading you want to sort, or choose the column in the Search By drop-down list.
For example, you want to see all the procedures that were performed by a specific physician, so you
click on the “Performing Physician” column heading.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Š An arrow appears in the column heading to indicate which column is currently being sorted.
2. Press the column heading again to switch between ascending and descending order.
Š An up-pointing arrow indicates that the column is sorted in ascending order. That is, sorted in
alphabetical order or numerical order from smallest to largest.
Š A down-pointing arrow indicates that the column is sorted in descending order. That is, sorted in
reverse alphabetical order or numerical order from largest to smallest.
Figure A6-4 Column with ascending sort

Open Exams and Images


Follow this process to open exams and images for viewing.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


1. Press the [+] button to the left of the exam name to open it.
Š The series for the exam expands below the exam.
2. Press the series to open it (or, select the series and press [+] to see image details).
Š The image detail opens.
3. Select the image.
Š A preview thumbnail appears.
4. Press the image (or, select the image and press [VIEWER]).
Š The selected series opens on the Image Viewer screen with the selected image displayed.

Copy Exams and Images


Exams (including all series and images) may be copied to a network host or to a CD. The images from one
exam may be copied to another exam.
NOTE: Copying exams does not remove the exam from its original location.

Copy Exams to a Network Host


Exams may be copied from the local database to a configured network location or vice versa. Exams
cannot be copied from one network host to another network host. Refer to Chapter A7: Set Preferences
for information about configuring network hosts.
NOTE: If the GE Portable DR Detector is used in a mobile unit, the unit must be connected to the network.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A6-9
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A6: Image Management

1. Select the exams to copy.


2. Press [DESTINATION].

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Š A message appears: “Images will be copied to (host name). Select OK to confirm.”
3. Press [OK].
Š If there is a problem and the exams cannot be copied to the selected network host, a message
appears: “The network destination is not responding. If the problem persists contact your network
administrator.”
4. Press OK to close the message. Make sure that the unit is properly connected to the network or try
copying the exams at a later time.
Š To see the status of the exams being copied, press [TRANSFER LOG] at the bottom of the Image
Management screen.
Š The Transfer Log screen (Figure A6-5) appears.
5. Press [CLOSE] to close the screen and return to the Image Management screen.
Figure A6-5 Transfer Log screen

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Copy Images to Another Exam
This process is used to copy images from one exam to another. Copying images is used to consolidate
images from multiple exams to a single exam and to reconcile patients to exams. For example, images
taken for an emergency exam can be assigned to the patient’s real name once the patient’s information
is known. Another example is to assign images that were acquired for the wrong Worklist entry to the
correct patient.
Images are copied to procedures that appear on the Worklist. Once the copy is complete, the procedure
is marked as “Completed” on the Worklist and the new exam appears on the Image Management screen.
Images may be copied to procedures with the status of Suspended, Discontinued, or Scheduled. Images
may not be copied to procedures with a status of Completed.
NOTE: You can only copy the images from one exam at a time.
NOTE: You cannot copy images to multiple Worklist procedures.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A6-10
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A6: Image Management

1. If necessary, create a Worklist procedure entry for the patient with the appropriate information.
a) On the Worklist screen, click [ADD PATIENT].

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
b) Enter the patient’s information. Refer to Chapter A3: Worklist-Add / Edit Patient Information (p. A3-
15) for more information.
c) Click [SAVE].
2. On the Image Management screen, select the exam to copy.
3. Switch the [IMAGE TOOLS] button to COPY EXAM, if necessary.
Š The Copy Exam screen appears.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Š The Copy Exam screen shows all Worklist entries with the status of “Scheduled”, “Discontinued”, or
“Suspended”.
4. Search or Filter the exam list to locate the destination exam.
5. Select the exam where you want the images copied to.
6. Press [OK].
Š A message appears: “Images will be copied to the selected exam. Images will not automatically be
removed from the source exam. The destination exam will be marked as Completed.”
7. Click [OK].
Š The message closes.
Š A message appears: “Copying Images”
Š [CANCEL] stops the copy process, closes the message, and returns you to the Image Management
screen.
Š All series and images are copied to the exam.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A6-11
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A6: Image Management

Copy Exams to a CD
If your unit has an external CD drive, exams may be copied to a CD for archiving purposes, to send to a

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
location that is not within the network, or to include with a patient’s medical records.
NOTE: The CDs used for copying images must be recordable. That is, the CD should be labeled “CD-R”
(recordable).
DO NOT use re-writable (CD-RW) disks. The system cannot write to this type of disk.
NOTE: You cannot copy exams to a CD that already has exams or other information saved on it. You will
receive a message, “CD is not blank. Please insert a blank CD to proceed” when you attempt to
copy images to the CD. Always use a new, blank CD.
1. Open the CD tray. (Select Eject from the [CD1] drop-down list.)
NOTE: Pressing the Eject button on the workstation PC does not open the CD tray. When working on the
Image Management screen, always use the Eject option from the [CD1] drop-down list (Figure A6-
6).
Figure A6-6 CD 1 button drop down list

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


2. Insert a blank CD into the tray.
3. Press Source [CD1] to close the CD tray.
4. Select the exams to copy.
5. Click the Destination [CD1].
Š The CD Write screen appears.

Š [DESELECT ALL] unchecks all exams on the list.


Š [STORE OPTIMALLY] determines which exams to copy to best utilize the space on the CD. It will
automatically uncheck exams that cannot fit on the CD.
Š [WRITE] begins the copying process.
Š [CANCEL] closes the screen and returns you to the Image Management screen.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A6-12
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A6: Image Management

6. Confirm the exams to be copied. Uncheck any exams that you do not want saved to the CD.
7. Press [WRITE].

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Š The CD begins copying. The light on the front of the computer flashes yellow as the data is being
written.
Š To see the status of the exams being copied, press [TRANSFER LOG] at the bottom of the Image
Management screen.
Š The Transfer Log screen appears.
Š Press [CLOSE] to close the screen and return to the Image Management screen.
Š When complete, the CD tray will open and close.
8. After the system finishes the CD, open the exams on the CD to ensure that the CD has the data
written to it. Refer to Load Images from a CD (p. A6-7) for more information.
9. Remove the CD.
10. Label the CD and store in a safe place.

Delete Exams, Series, or Images

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Exams, series, and images may be deleted from the local database from the Image Management screen.
Follow this process to delete exams, series, and images.
1. Select the Local source, if necessary.
NOTE: Items cannot be deleted from a CD or network locations.
2. Unlock exams, if necessary.
Š Refer to Lock Exams from Deletion (p. A6-14) for more information.
3. Select the items to delete.
Š The items may be exams, series with an exam, or images within a series. Multiple items may be
selected and deleted at once.
4. Press [DELETE].
Š A message appears: “Are you sure that you would like to delete the selected items?”
5. Press [OK].
Š The message closes.
Š The items are deleted from the Image Management screen.
Š [CANCEL] closes the message and the items remain on the Image Management screen.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A6-13
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A6: Image Management

Lock Exams from Deletion


The Image Management screen allows you to prevent, or “lock”, exams from being deleted. The exam

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
can only be deleted if the lock is removed, or “unlocked.” The lock prevents exams from being deleted by
other operators and from Auto Delete. Refer to Chapter A7: Set Preferences-Image Management (p. A7-
18) for more information about Auto Delete.
Locked exams can still be copied, transferred, and viewed.
Only exams can be locked. Individual series or images cannot be locked.
Follow this process to lock and unlock exams.
1. Select the exams to lock.
Š Multiple exams may be selected and locked at once.
2. Press [LOCK].
Š The lock icon appears in the status column of all selected exams.

Š The [LOCK] button changes to [UNLOCK].

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Unlock Exams
Follow this process to unlock exams so that they may be deleted.
1. Select the locked exams.
Š The Unlock button becomes active.
2. Press [UNLOCK].
Š The lock icon is removed from the status column of the selected exams.
Š The exams may now be deleted.
NOTE: You are able to lock or unlock multiple exams even if the selected exams are a mixture of locked
and unlocked. Pressing the [LOCK] button will lock all selected exams. Clicking the button again
will unlock all selected exams.

Make Exam Anonymous (De-Identify)


There may be times when you want the name of a patient to be kept confidential to maintain patient
privacy. You can do this using the De-Identify feature. This feature allows you to create an anonymous
set of images.
The patient examinations are copied and used to create a new patient, with the name “Anonymized
patient” and a unique, randomly created Patient ID as shown in Figure A6-8.
NOTE: The original exam is not modified in any way, only a copy is altered.
NOTE: Once an anonymous exam is created, there is no way to recover the patient’s identifying
information.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A6-14
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A6: Image Management

The De-Identify option is available from the Image Tools button (Figure A6-7).
Figure A6-7 Image Tools button

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Figure A6-8 Anonymous patient

Use this process to make exam images anonymous:


1. Select the exams to make anonymous.
2. Switch the Image Tools button to [DE-IDENTIFY], if necessary.
Š A message appears: “The selected exams will be copied without patient identification. The
originals will not be deleted.”

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


3. Press [OK].
Š The Image Management screen updates with copied, anonymous exams.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A6-15
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Chapter A7: Set Preferences

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Preferences allow a super-user to customize the system. This chapter explains the Preferences available
to you and how to activate or change the preferences for your facility, such as:
• Predefine X-ray procedure parameters so that any stored procedure may be retrieved from memory,
allowing you to access technique factors programmed for that type of procedure.
• Enable automatic networking and printing features.
• Customize system default annotations and image orientation.
• Create preferences for image processing.
• Save commonly used operator and physician names in your system for later recall.
Topics covered include:

• System (p. A7-2) • Exam (p. A7-30)


– Network Connections (p. A7-2) • Image Processing (p. A7-31)
– Printers (p. A7-7) – Build Custom Looks (p. A7-32)
• Worklist (p. A7-13) – Tissue Equalization Overview (p. A7-36)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


– Default Query (p. A7-13) • Protocols (p. A7-39)
– Preset Names (p. A7-15) – Backup Protocol Database to CD (p. A7-40)
• Image Management (p. A7-18) – Retrieve Protocol Database from CD (p. A7-
– Copy Exam (p. A7-18) 41)
– Auto Tag (Quality Check) (p. A7-19) – Edit Protocol Database (p. A7-41)
– Auto Print (p. A7-19) – Protocol Editor Copy Functions (p. A7-49)
– Auto Send (Auto Push) (p. A7-22)
– Auto Delete (p. A7-23)
• Image Viewer (p. A7-25)
– Configure Pre-set Annotations (p. A7-25)
• DEI (Detector Exposure Index) (p. A7-28)

Preferences are set on the Utilities screen (Figure A7-1), which is accessed by pressing the [UTILITIES]
button on the Worklist.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-1
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Figure A7-1 System Utilities screen

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
System
This section provides instructions for setting your system preferences for network and printer
connections. The Services Desktop, Log Off, and Shut Down functions are also available from this screen.
Refer to Chapter A2: General Information for more information about logging off and Shut Down.

Network Connections
Network and printer connections are configured through the Utilities System-System screen. This screen
allows qualified service personnel to define the Digital Imaging and COmmunication in Medicine (DICOM)
send destinations.
Network connections may be added, removed, or edited from this screen.
Follow this process to access the Network Connections screen.
1. On the Worklist screen, press [UTILITIES].
Š The System-System screen appears.
2. Press [NETWORK CONNECTIONS].
Š The Network Connections screen (Figure A7-2) appears.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-2
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Figure A7-2 Network Connections screen

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
Add or Edit Network Host
Adding and editing network hosts use very similar process and the same screens as shown in Figure A7-
3 and Figure A7-4. Table A7-1 and Table A7-2 describe the fields in detail.
• If editing an existing connection, select the network host and press [EDIT].
• If adding a new connection, press [ADD].
1. Complete requested information for both tabs (see Table A7-1 and Table A7-2) and press [SAVE] to
add the network host or save the changes.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-3
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Figure A7-3 Add Network Host – Host tab

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
Table A7-1 Add Network Host – Hosts tab description

Function Description

Host Label The name of the host that appears in the Network Hosts lists and on the
Image Management screen.
NOTE: Host labels cannot have spaces in the name. Use underscores
( _ ) to separate words.

Application Entry Title The DICOM application title.

IP Address The IP address of the network host.

Port Number The port number for the network host.

Query Retrieve Sets the type of information the host will provide on query from another
host.
Available options are:
• No provider
• Study
• Patient

Storage Commitment Designates if the host will store image data.

Storage Commitment - The DICOM application title.


Application Entry Title

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-4
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Function Description

Storage Commitment - The IP address of the storage database.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Network Address

Storage Commitment - The port number of the storage database.


Port Number

Comments Allows you to add notes about the network host or configuration.

Figure A7-4 Add Network Host – Preferences tab

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Table A7-2 Add Network Host – Preferences tab description

Function Description

Allow this host to query the (GE Allows this host to search and filter the GE Portable DR
Portable DR Detector system name) Detectorsystem.

Allow this host to retrieve from the Allows this host to open and display exams from the GE
(GE Portable DR Detector system Portable DR Detectorsystem.
name)

Allow this host to send images to the Allows the host to send images to the GE Portable DR
(GE Portable DR Detector system Detectorsystem.
name)

This network host accepts multiple Allows multiple frame images to be send to this network
frame image. host.

Perform de-identification Automatically de-identifies any images that the GE Portable


(anonymous patient images) when DR Detector system sends to this host.
sending to this network host. Refer to Chapter A6: Image Management-Make Exam
Anonymous (De-Identify) (p. A6-14) for more information
about de-identification.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-5
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Function Description

Apply “Burn-On-Send” to images Burns the VOI LUT (Look-Up Tables) into the DICOM header to

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
when sending to this network host. be displayed by PACS.
Leaving his option unselected sends all available VOI LUTs to
the DICOM header for PACS to query and apply.
NOTE: PACS should be configured to read the first VOI LUT for
proper display of images on the Acquisition
workstation.

Send MPPS N-Create and N-Set This node acts as the Destination for receiving the MPPS N-
notification to this network host. Create & N-Set Notification. When configured for MPPS, the
System sends information like which exam is in progress,
when a Study is completed, how many images were
acquired, and what was the radiation dose to which the
patient was exposed during that session, etc.

Make this host the HIS/RIS source. Designates the host as the DICOM Worklist provider. Defining
(Only one host can be designated as the Radiology Information System (RIS) and Hospital
the HIS/RIS source.) Information System (HIS) host allows you to download
patient worklists from those networks to your system.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


NOTE: Only one HIS/RIS source may be designated on the
system. Selecting this option will de-select any other
hosts as the HIS/RIS source.

Remove Network Host


Follow this process to remove a network host.
1. From the Network Connections screen, select the network host.
2. Press [REMOVE].
Š A message appears: “Are you sure you want to remove (host name)?”
3. Press [YES].
Š [CANCEL] closes the message and returns you to the Network Connections screen without
removing the connection.
Š The network host is removed.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-6
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Perform C-Echo Test


Use this function when you want to check to see if the system is communicating with a particular

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
network host.
For mobile units, the unit must be connected to the network for this test to be of any value.
1. Select a host from the Network Hosts list.
2. Press [C-ECHO TEST].
Š A message appears to notify you if the test passed or failed.
Š A “passed” message means that the network host is working and that you can retrieve exams
from it or transfer exams to it.
Failed C-Echo Test
A “failed” message means that the system could not contact the network host.
Perform the following tasks to resolve the problem:
• Check that the unit is connected to the network.
• Try connecting the unit to a different network port. There may be a problem with the port itself.
• For units with wireless connection:

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


– Check the signal strength
¾ Remove any metal that is covering the antenna (e.g, lead apron, clip board)
¾ Move the unit to another area with better reception
– Try software reset to establish the wireless connection
• Re-try the test at a later time. The host may be temporarily unavailable.
• Confirm the host configuration on the Edit screen.
• If the problem persists, contact your technical support group or system administrator.

Printers
Follow this process to access the Network Connections screen.
1. On the Worklist screen, press [UTILITIES].
Š The System-System screen appears.
2. Press [NETWORK CONNECTIONS].
Š The Network Connections screen (Figure A7-5) appears.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-7
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Figure A7-5 Network Connections screen

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Add or Edit DICOM Printers
Adding and editing printers use very similar process and the same screens shown in Figure A7-6,

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Figure A7-7, and Figure A7-8. Table A7-3, Table A7-4, and Table A7-5 describe the fields in detail.
1. If Editing an existing printer’s configuration, select the printer from the DICOM Printers list and press
[EDIT].
Š If adding a new printer, press [ADD].
2. Complete requested information for all tabs (see Table A7-3, Table A7-4, and Table A7-5) and press
[SAVE] to add the printer or save the changes.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-8
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Figure A7-6 Add Printer screen – Printer Tab

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
Table A7-3 Add Printer screen– Printer Tab description

Function Description

DICOM Printer Label The name of the printer that appears in the DICOM Printers list and on the
print setup screens.
NOTE: DICOM printer labels cannot have spaces in the name. Use underscores
( _ ) to separate words.

Application Entry The DICOM application title.


Title

Network Address The IP address of the printer.

Port Number The port number of the printer.

Pixel Depth The resolution of the printer.

Printer Pixel Size Designates the pixel size the printer uses. This is specified by the printer
(micron) manufacturer.

Configuration A place for you to add notes about the printer or configuration.
Information

Density Sets the minimum and maximum density range.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-9
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Function Description

Magnification Type Available options are:

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
• Replicate
• Bilinear
• Cubic
• None

Smooth Factor Sets the image smoothing factor.

Trim Designates if there is to be trim or not.

Polarity Available options are:


• Normal
• Reverse

Border Density Sets the color of the image border.


Available options are:
• Black

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


• White

Empty Image Sets the color of areas that have no image printed.
Density Available options are:
• Black
• White

Printer Memory Size Designates the memory size of the printer. This is specified by the printer
manufacturer.

Figure A7-7 Add Printer screen – Layouts tab

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-10
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Table A7-4 Add Printer screen– Layouts Tab description

Function Description

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Select the desired layouts Selections allow the number of images that may be printed on a single
allowed for this printer sheet of film or paper. Some selections control the orientation of the
images on the page: for example, 2 images per page may be side by
side or one on top of the other.

Slide formats Selections allow the side formats available for the printer, if any.

Figure A7-8 Add Printer – Film Sizes tab

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Table A7-5 Add Printer screen– Film sizes description

Function Description

Film sizes (8 x 10in) Selects the sizes of film available for the printer.

Pixel size: W (width) Sets how wide the film is in pixels.


This value is provided by the printer manufacturer based on what the
printer supports.

Pixel size: H (height) Sets how high the film is in pixels.


This value is provided by the printer manufacturer based on what the
printer supports.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-11
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Remove DICOM Printer


Follow this process to remove a printer.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
1. From the Network Connections screen, select the printer.
2. Press [REMOVE].
Š A message appears: “Are you sure you want to remove (printer name)?”
3. Press [YES].
Š [CANCEL] closes the message and returns you to the Network Connections screen without
removing the connection.
Š The printer is removed.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-12
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Worklist
Worklist preferences are available from the Utilities screen.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
1. On the Worklist screen, press [UTILITIES].
2. Select Preferences > Worklist.
Figure A7-9 Preferences – Worklist screen

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Default Query
The Worklist Default Query controls the amount of HIS/RIS information that appears on the Worklist and
allows you to enable and configure the auto-refresh function.
1. Complete or edit the Worklist Default Query screen (Figure A7-10). Table A7-6 describes the fields in
detail.
2. Press [SAVE] to change the Default Query.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-13
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Figure A7-10 Worklist Default Query screen

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Table A7-6 Worklist Default Query description

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Function Description

Show list for Determines Worklist items by system or modality.


• This system – exams for this unit only
• All systems in modality – exams for all digital x-ray
• All systems – exams for all modalities

Include Allows you to include or exclude completed or discontinued exams on the


Worklist.

Date Range Selects the date range of scheduled procedures to show on the Worklist.
Available options are:
• All
• Current Day

Plus previous Shows procedures that are scheduled for the specified time before the
__ Days __ Hours selected date range.
NOTE: If the “Days” value is left blank, the worklist query will be based on
current time plus the number of hours entered.

Plus future Shows procedures that are scheduled for the specified time after the
__ Days __ Hours selected date range.
NOTE: If the “Days” value is left blank, the worklist query will be based on
current time minus the number of hours entered.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-14
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Function Description

Auto Refresh Turns Auto Refresh on or off.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
[ON] [OFF]

Refresh every __ If Auto Refresh is [ON], sets how often (in minutes) the Worklist refreshes.
Minutes The interval may be between 1 and 9999 minutes.

Auto Refresh
The Worklist Auto-Refresh feature automatically refreshes the Patient Worklist at predefined time
intervals.
NOTE: You will not be able to make selections or access Worklist functions while the Worklist is refreshing.
NOTE: For large facilities, it is recommended that the auto refresh interval be set to a short time, for
example, every 1 or 2 minutes. The system will refresh more often, but each refresh will take less
time to complete.

Preset Names
The Preset Names screen (Figure A7-12) allows you to add, remove, or edit the names that appear on the

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Add Patient/Patient Information screen’s Operators, Performing Physicians, and Referring Physicians
drop-down lists (Figure A7-11).
Figure A7-11 Drop-down lists on the Add Patient screen

1. Follow the procedures below to Add, Edit, or Remove Preset Names.


2. When finished, press [SAVE] to retain the changes you made.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-15
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Figure A7-12 Preset Names screen

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
Add Preset Names
1. Press [ADD] for the appropriate group.
2. Type the name to add.
3. Press [ADD].

Edit Preset Names


1. Select the name to change.
2. Press [EDIT] for the group.
3. Edit the name as appropriate.
4. Press [SAVE].

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-16
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Remove Preset Names


1. Select the name to remove.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
2. Press [REMOVE] for the group.
3. Press [OK] to remove the name.
Š Press [NO] to keep the name.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-17
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Image Management
Image Management preferences allow you to enable and configure the Copy Exam, Auto Tag, Auto Print,

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Auto Push, and Auto Delete functions.
Figure A7-13 Preferences – Image Management

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Copy Exam
Enabling the Copy Exam function allows exams to be copied between the local databases and network
hosts. It also allows exams to be copied to a CD.
There is no configuration for this function; it is either enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF).
Follow this process to enable or disable Copy Exam:
1. From the Worklist screen, press [UTILITIES].
2. Select Preferences > Image Management.
3. Press Copy Exam [ON] to enable the function.
Š Copy Exam [OFF] disables the function.
4. Press [CLOSE].

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-18
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Auto Tag (Quality Check)


Enabling Auto Tag (or Quality Check) provides an indicator on the Image Viewer screen to mark an image

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
of acceptable quality. Auto Print and Auto Delete can be configured to act upon images that have the
Quality Check mark.
There is no configuration for this function; it is either enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF).
Follow this process to enable or disable Auto Tag:
1. From the Worklist screen, press [UTILITIES].
2. Select Preferences > Image Management.
3. Press Auto Tag [ON] to enable the function.
Š Auto Tag [OFF] disables the function.
4. Press [CLOSE].

Auto Print
Default Print/Auto Print (Figure A7-14) allows you to configure your printer parameters. This is done so
that you do not need to select all the parameters each time you print an image.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


You can select a primary and alternative location as well as how many copies you want each time you
print.
For mobile units, Auto Print will begin the next time the unit is connected to the network.
Follow this process to configure Auto Print.
1. From the Worklist screen, press [UTILITIES].
2. Select Preferences > Image Management.
3. Click Auto Print [EDIT].
Š The Default Print/Auto Print screen appears.
4. Complete the information as described in Table A7-7.
5. When finished, press [SAVE] to retain your changes.
6. Press [CLOSE].

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-19
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Figure A7-14 Auto Print

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
Table A7-7 Auto Print Functions

Function Description

Printer Lists the printers and laser cameras connected to your system.

Film Orientation Sets if the image will print on the film horizontally or vertically.
Available options are:
• Portrait – vertical film orientation
• Landscape – horizontal film orientation

Print Mode Provides options on the size of the image data printed.
Available options are:
• True Size
• Fit to Film
• Reduce Size
• Orthopedic Magnification (if enabled)

Magnification (%) If Reduced Size is selected as the Print Mode, allows you to enter the percent
by which the image will be reduced. The accepted range is between 40% and
90%.
If True Size or Fit to Film are selected as the Print Mode, the text box remains
disabled.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-20
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Function Description

Alternate Print Available options are:

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
mode • Reduce Size
• Left/Right Justified
• Fit to Film

Alternative Allows you to enter an image reduction factor for the secondary printer.
Magnification (%)

Format Allows you to choose the formats available for the selected printer.
Available options are:
• Standard
• Slide
• Superslide

Media Size Allows you to choose the size of the media available for the selected printer.

Media Type Allows you to choose the media types available for the selected printer.
Available options are:

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


• Paper
• Clear Film
• Blue Film

Destination Allows you to choose the destinations available for the selected printer.
Available options are:
• Magazine
• Processor

Magnification Type Allows you to choose the magnification types available for the selected
printer.
Available options are:
• Replicate
• Bilinear
• Cubic
• None

Auto Print If Auto Tag is enabled, turning Auto Print [ON] will automatically print all
[ON] [OFF] images that have the Auto Tag mark when the Image Viewer screen is closed.
[OFF] disables the Auto Print function.

Upon closing the Allows the choice to automatically re-print or to not print any images that
exam… were printed manually from the Image Viewer screen.

[SAVE] Saves the current selections and values as the default printing configuration.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-21
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Function Description

[CANCEL] Closes the Auto Print screen without saving your changes.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Auto Send (Auto Push)
Auto Send automatically transfers images to another network device when the exam is closed. Auto
Send is enabled and configured from the Utilities – Preferences screen.
For mobile units, Auto Send will begin the next time the unit is connected to the network.
Follow this process to configure Auto Send.
1. From the Worklist screen, press [UTILITIES].
2. Select Preferences > Image Management.
3. Click Auto Push [EDIT].
Š The Auto Send screen appears.
4. Complete the information as described in Table A7-8.
5. When finished, press [SAVE] to retain your changes.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Figure A7-15 Auto Send

Table A7-8 Auto Send Functions

Function Description

Auto Send Turns Auto Send on or off.


[ON] [OFF] Selecting On allows you to configure the default Auto Send settings.

Network Host column Lists the available network locations where images may be transferred.
Refer to Network Connections (p. A7-2) for information about how to
configure the available Network Hosts.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-22
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Function Description

Auto Send column Allows you to choose which images are sent to each network host. You may

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
choose either Raw or Processed, both, or none. Leaving both choices
unselected means that no images will be sent to the network host.

[SAVE] Saves your selections as the default settings and closes the Auto Send
screen.

[CANCEL] Closes the screen without saving your changes.

Auto Delete
Auto Delete automatically deletes images when the image database does not have enough space. Auto
Delete is enabled from the Utilities – Preferences screen.
Follow this process to configure Auto Delete.
1. From the Worklist screen, press [UTILITIES].
2. Select Preferences > Image Management.
3. Click Auto Delete [EDIT].

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Š The Auto Delete screen appears.
4. Complete the information as described in Table A7-9.
5. When finished, press [SAVE] to retain your changes.
6. Press [CLOSE].
Figure A7-16 Auto Delete

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-23
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Table A7-9 Auto Delete functions

Function Description

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Auto Delete Turns Auto Delete on or off.
[ON] [OFF]

Auto Delete images when Specifies when to auto delete images based on database size.
database is __% full.

Delete images until Specifies how many images to delete based on database size.
database is __% full.

Images must be at least Specifies how old (in days) an image must be for it to be deleted. Images
__ Days old before that are less than the entered number will not be deleted.
deletion.

Images must meet __ of Allows you to constrain the deletion of raw and processed images
the checked options based upon checkbox selection (see below).
before deletion.
Available options are:
• All

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


• Any
• None

Processed image printed Selecting the Print parameter allows auto deletion of images that have
been printed.

Processed image sent Allows auto deletion of processed images with no errors that have been
sent to another viewing station.

Processed image Allows auto deletion of processed images that have been sent to a long
committed term device with storage commitment capability.
Storage commitment for a network host is configured from the System
– System screen, Network Connections.

Allow Non-Quality Allows auto deletion of any images that do not have the Auto Tag
Checked (tagged) images (Quality Check) mark.
to be deleted regardless
of being sent, committed NOTE: If any of the images in the series have the Auto Tag (Quality Check)
or printed. mark, the series will not auto delete.

[SAVE] Saves your changes and closes the screen.

[CANCEL] Closes the screen without saving changes.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-24
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Image Viewer
Figure A7-17 Preferences - Viewer screen

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
Configure Pre-set Annotations
Viewer Preferences allow you to add, edit, or remove pre-set annotations.
Follow this process to configure pre-set annotations.
1. From the Worklist screen, press [UTILITIES].
2. Select Preferences > Viewer.
3. Press Pre-set Annotation [EDIT].
Š The Pre-set Annotations editing screen (Figure A7-18) appears.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-25
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Figure A7-18 Pre-set Annotation editing

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
4. To change the order of the list, select the annotation.
5. Press the [] or [] button to move the item up or down the list.
6. Continue with Add Pre-set Annotation (p. A7-26), Edit Pre-set Annotation (p. A7-26), or Remove Pre-set
Annotation (p. A7-27).
7. When finished, press [SAVE] to retain your changes.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


8. Press [CLOSE].
Add Pre-set Annotation
1. From the Pre-set Annotations screen, press [ADD].
2. Enter the text of the annotation.
3. Press [ADD].

Edit Pre-set Annotation


1. From the Pre-set Annotations screen, select the annotation.
2. Press [EDIT].
3. Edit the text of the annotation.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-26
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

4. Press [SAVE].

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Remove Pre-set Annotation
1. From the Pre-set Annotations screen, select the annotation.
2. Press [REMOVE].
Š A message appears: “Are you sure you would like to delete the annotation – (annotation name)?”
3. Press [OK].

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-27
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

DEI (Detector Exposure Index)


Figure A7-19 Preferences - DEI screen

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
The Detector Exposure Index screen allows you to control if or how the DEI is displayed on the Image
Viewer screen and to change the lower and upper limits for anatomical views.
These settings determine how DEI is displayed for all images.
Follow this process to change the DEI settings.
1. From the Worklist screen, press [UTILITIES].
2. Select Preferences > DEI.
3. Press DEI Preferences [EDIT].
Š The Detector Exposure Index screen (Figure A7-20) appears.
4. Continue with Change the DEI Display (p. A7-29) or Change the Lower and Upper Limits (p. A7-29).

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-28
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Figure A7-20 Detector Exposure Index screen

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Change the DEI Display

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


1. On the Detector Exposure Index screen, press the DEI Display drop-down list to open it.
2. Select the display option.
Š Available options are:
– No Display In this example, there is no DEI information displayed on
the Image Viewer screen.

– Numerical In this example, only numerical DEI information is


displayed on the Image Viewer screen.

– Graphical In this example, DEI information is displayed is both


numerically and graphically on the Image Viewer screen.
This is the recommended display option.

3. Press [SAVE] to apply the change and close the screen.


Š [CLOSE] closes the screen without saving the changes.

Change the Lower and Upper Limits


1. On the Detector Exposure Index screen, press an anatomical category to expand it.
Š Press the category again to close it.
2. Change the lower and upper limits in the text boxes as appropriate for the view.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-29
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all applicable anatomical categories.


4. Press [SAVE] when finished to apply the changes and close the screen.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Š [CLOSE] closes the screen without saving the changes.

Enable or Disable Technical Mode


Technical Mode is a special setting that configures the system for image quality testing and detector
calibration. When Technical Mode is enabled, DEI is calculated using the central area of the image (512
pixels x 512 pixels) regardless of the imaged anatomy.
IMPORTANT!: Do not acquire exam images when Technical Mode is enabled. The use of Technical Mode
is reserved for image testing and calibration purposes only.
The checkbox (Figure A7-21) indicates if Technical Mode is enabled. Check or uncheck the box as
appropriate and press [SAVE] to apply the change and close the screen.
Figure A7-21 Technical Mode checkbox

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Export DEI Log
The DEI log records the exposure levels of images. Medical Physicists in your facility or GE Service
Personnel use the log to determine if there is a problem with the detector and to determine what
adjustments to make to correct exposure errors.
Follow this process to export the DEI log onto a CD.
1. If necessary, connect the external CD drive to the unit.
2. Insert a blank CD-R disc.
3. From the Worklist screen, press [UTILITIES].
4. Select Preferences > DEI.
5. Press the DEI Export Log [EXPORT] button.
6. Remove the disc when export is complete.

Exam
There are currently no preferences to configure on this screen.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-30
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Image Processing
The Image Processing preferences allow you to change which look is the default for the anatomical view.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Image Processing Preferences also allow you to view the settings of default factory looks or to create up
to five (5) custom looks.
NOTE: Custom looks and the default looks mapping can be backed up by having GE Service personnel
perform a system backup. It is recommended that a system backup be performed after any change
to the default looks mapping or when custom looks are built. Ask your GE Service personnel to
perform the system backup at their next visit. GE Service personnel can restore the settings from
the backup, if necessary.
Figure A7-22 Preferences – Image Processing

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Change Default Factory Looks for Exams
The Default Factory Looks screen (Figure A7-23) allows you to change the default processing setting for
all 34 representative anatomical views, and then map this change to related anatomical views. Note that
this may over-ride existing default settings.
At the initial applications setup, the radiologist chooses the default look for each anatomical view.
Application specialists assign the looks to the system.
Follow this process to change the default factory looks.
1. From the Worklist screen, press [UTILITIES].
2. Select Preferences > Image Processing.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-31
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

3. Press Default Factory Looks [EDIT].


4. Use the drop-down lists to change the default for the desired anatomical views.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
5. When finished, click [MAP] to save the changes.
Š A message appears: “Default look settings for selected Representative Anatomical Views will be
mapped to related anatomical views.“
6. Click [CONFIRM] to apply the looks settings. [CONFIRM] will close the message and return you to the
Image Processing screen.
Š [CANCEL] closes the message and returns you to the Default Factory Looks screen.
Figure A7-23 Default Factory Looks

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Build Custom Looks
Looks are the way an image is processed to be viewed by a radiologist for interpretation.
Looks are pre-defined combinations of brightness, contrast, edge enhancement, and tissue equalization
(TE). Refer to Tissue Equalization Overview (p. A7-36) for more information.
Factory Look descriptions:
• Factory Look 1 – similar to analog film, low edge, no TE
• Factory Look 2 – low CR look, low edge, moderate tissue contrast
• Factory Look 3 – moderate CR look, low edge, TE
• Factory Look 4 – highly digital look, high edge, high TE
Follow this process to create an new custom look.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-32
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Recommendation: When building a custom look, start with the factory look that is closest to the desired
result. Write down the values and apply them to a new custom process. Then change the applicable
variables.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
1. From the Worklist screen, press [UTILITIES].
2. Select Preferences > Image Processing.
3. Press Image Processing [EDIT].
Š The Image Processing Preference Editor (Figure A7-24) appears.
Figure A7-24 Image Processing Preference Editor

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


4. Select the Anatomy (for example: Chest, Abdomen, Lumbar Spine, etc.).
5. Select the View (for example: antero-posterior or lateral).
6. Select the Image Type (some systems may only have Standard image type available).
7. Select the Patient Size. Available options are: Small Adult, Medium Adult, Large Adult, Small Pediatric,
Medium Pediatric, or Large Pediatric.
8. Select the Look. Choose the first “Undefined” Custom look.
NOTE: If a Factory Look is selected, parameters are read-only. Only Custom processing looks can be
changed.
9. Enter new name in Look Description to rename the look:
Š The system will not accept a new look if the name remains “Undefined.”
10. Check the Make Default box to set this look at the default for the selected Anatomy.
11. Adjust parameters as described in Table A7-10. Parameters may be adjusted in any order.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-33
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Table A7-10 Image Processing parameters

Parameter Definition

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Contrast Adjusts image contrast. Also known as window width.
Adjust • Move the slider right for more contrast (towards pure black and white).
• Move the slider left for less contrast (towards uniform gray).
Range: 25% – 400% with increment of 1%

Brightness Adjusts image brightness from 25-210%. Also known as window level.
Adjust • Move the slider right for a lighter image.
• Move the slider left for a darker image.
NOTE: Brightness Adjust and Contrast Adjust should not be used for per-image
tuning/correction of brightness and contrast. They are used to modify the
default look of images from a particular exam. For example, if images from a
particular type of exam are appearing consistently lighter than they should
be, the Brightness Adjust slider can be moved left to adjust. However, for small
alterations of brightness on a particular image, use the Brightness and
Contrast controls in the Image Viewer screen.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Tissue Controls the general contrast between the thick and thin anatomy.
Contrast • Move the slider right to decrease bone/soft-tissue contrast.
• Move the slider left to increase bone/soft-tissue contrast.
Range: –0.15 to 0.15 with 0.01 increments.
NOTE: Unlike Tissue Equalization, which controls contrast within under-penetrated
(thick) or over-penetrated (thin) areas, Tissue Contrast controls the general
contrast between the thick and thin anatomy. For example, Tissue Contrast
can be used in combination with Tissue Equalization to define a Chest PA look
that is equalized in the lung fields, but with light spine/ribs.

Edge The amount of detail visible in bone structures. Increased edge equals increased
detail.
• Move the slider right to make images sharper.
• Move the slider left to make images smoother.
Range: 1 to 10 (discrete setting) with increments of 1

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-34
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Parameter Definition

Noise Suppresses the mottle noise in denser areas of the anatomy while preserving detail

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Reduction in the rest of the image.
Available options are:
• None – no noise reduction
• Low
• Medium
• High – maximum noise reduction
NOTE: The noise reduction feature suppresses the mottle noise in denser areas of
the anatomy while preserving detail in the rest of the image. The algorithm
takes into account tissue penetration and dose reaching the detector. For
example, if two Chest PA images were acquired on the same patient, one with
much higher dose than the other, noise reduction may only affect the lower
dose (higher noise) image. In general, the lowest Noise Reduction setting that
produces the desired image quality should be selected.

TE Settings See Tissue Equalization section for range and effect of TE sliders.
NOTE: The combined total of the TE Under-penetrated and TE Over-penetrated

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


areas cannot exceed 100%. The slider will automatically stop and a message
appears: “The Total Area cannot exceed 100%. Reduce the (Under- or Over-)
Penetrated area to proceed.”

12. When finished adjusting parameters, press [SAVE] or [SAVE TO MULTIPLE].


Š [SAVE] applies the parameters to the currently selected patient size.
– A message appears: “Save changes?”
13. Press [YES].
Š [SAVE TO MULTIPLE] applies the parameters to multiple patient sizes within the selected anatomy.
– The Save to Multiple screen appears.
14. Select the Patient Size to save the new look to.
15. Press [SAVE].

16. Press [CLOSE] on the Image Processing Preference Editor.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-35
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Change Image Processing from the Viewer


Changing the image processing from the Image Viewer screen allows the user to preview the effect of

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
different looks (factory or custom) before applying the look to the image.
The Image Processing settings may be accessed from the Image Viewer screen or the Utilities screen.
From the Image Viewer screen:
1. Select the Reprocessing palette from the tool selection list.
2. Press [EDIT PROC].
Follow the steps listed above to make the processing changes.
When opened from the Image Viewer screen the, Image Processing Preference Editor screen also has a
[PREVIEW] and [APPLY TO IMAGE] button.
• [PREVIEW] applies the settings to the currently selected image in the Image Viewer screen so that you
can see the effect before saving the changes.
• [APPLY TO IMAGE] creates a new instance of the image processed with the selected look.
Figure A7-25 Image processing preferences editor screen opened from the Viewer

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Tissue Equalization Overview


Tissue Equalization (TE) is an advanced image-processing algorithm that improves contrast and visibility
in over-penetrated and under-penetrated regions of an image without compromising the contrast in
other regions of interest. In combination with the wide dynamic range of the digital detector, TE allows
display of more information collected in a single shot, reducing re-takes and increasing throughput.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-36
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

TE Usage
Over-penetrated Regions

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
An over-penetrated region in an image results from x-rays passing through a relatively less dense region
of the anatomy such as soft tissue (skin edge).
Over-penetrated regions of an image appear darker with reduced contrast. Using TE, the contrast in such
regions can be enhanced to improve visualization of soft-tissue. TE can also be used to enhance vessel
contrast in lungs. In Figure A7-26, the skin edge around the neck is more clearly defined with TE.
Under-penetrated Regions
An under-penetrated region in an image results from insufficient x-rays passing through relatively dense
anatomical regions. For example, anatomy containing dense tissue (abdomen) and bone (ankles/wrists/
shoulders) result in under-penetrated images.
Under-penetrated regions of an image such as the cervical and thoracic spine appear white- white spine
obscured by the overlaying anatomy like the white shoulders. Using TE, the overlaying anatomy can be
made grayer making the underlying spine more visible (Figure A7-26). A hand image can similarly be
displayed with improved bone contrast. This makes TE an invaluable tool in visualizing the entire bone
field.
Figure A7-26 Comparison with and without Tissue Equalization

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


TE Parameters
TE uses the information in the image to improve visualization. Two user-defined parameters; AREA and
STRENGTH; control the extent and amount of TE that is applied to the image. There is an AREA and
STRENGTH parameter for over-penetrated regions and an AREA and STRENGTH parameter for under-
penetrated regions.
Area
The AREA parameter defines the extent of application of the TE algorithm to the image. Increasing AREA
increases the number of image pixels to which TE is applied. For example, in Figure A7-27, setting the
AREA to 30% for under-penetrated region uses the pixels within the dotted ROI. Increasing AREA to 60%
increases the number of pixels where TE is applied, as indicated by the solid ROI.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-37
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Figure A7-27 Using the AREA parameter in TE

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
The combined AREA parameters for the over and under-penetrated regions cannot be greater than
100%. For example if the AREA parameter for over-penetrated regions is set to 40%, the AREA parameter
for under-penetrated regions cannot be greater than 60% (100-40).
Strength

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


The STRENGTH parameter affects the grayness of a region when TE is applied to it. For example,
increasing STRENGTH for under-penetrated regions such as shoulders makes a white region grayer.
Increasing STRENGTH for over-penetrated regions such as lungs makes a black region grayer. In both
cases, increasing STRENGTH generally makes the region grayer.
The effect of varying AREA and STRENGTH in TE is demonstrated in Figure A7-28 for under-penetrated
regions. Increasing STRENGTH while keeping the AREA constant makes the pixel grayer in the shoulder
region. Increasing AREA extends the region that becomes gray.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-38
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Figure A7-28 Varied TE settings

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
NOTE: Unlike Tissue Equalization, which controls contrast within under-penetrated (thick) or over-
penetrated (thin) areas, Tissue Contrast controls the general contrast between the thick and thin
anatomy. For example, Tissue Contrast can be used in combination with Tissue Equalization to
define a Chest PA look that is equalized in the lung fields, but with light spine/ribs.

Protocols
Protocols preferences allow you to create backup copies of the protocol database, retrieve saved
backups, and create new protocols.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-39
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Figure A7-29 Preferences - Protocols screen

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
Backup Protocol Database to CD
The Backup function allows you to save the entire protocols database (parameters) to a CD. This is
important when editing protocols; backup ensures that the current database stays intact. Backup is also
important in case of system failure and all protocol information is lost. If necessary, the old database can
be retrieved and used.
Follow this process to back up the database to a CD.
NOTE: Always use a new, blank CD-R for each back up.
DO NOT use re-writable (CD-RW) disks. The system cannot write to this type of disk.
1. If necessary, connect the external CD drive to the unit.
2. Insert a blank CD into the CD tray.
3. From the Worklist screen, press [UTILITIES].
Š The Utilities screen appears.
4. Select Preferences > Protocols.
5. Press [BACK UP].
Š A message appears: “Press OK to continue with Protocol Database back up.”

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-40
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

6. Press [OK].
Š A message appears: “Protocol Database back up in progress. Please Wait. This might take 2-3

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
minutes.“
– [CANCEL] stops the database backup.
Š When backup is complete, a message appears: “The Protocol Database back up operation is
successful.“
7. Press [OK] to dismiss the message.
8. Remove the CD from the CD tray.
9. Label the CD and store it in a safe place.

Retrieve Protocol Database from CD


The Retrieve function allows you to recover a protocol database that was saved to a CD.
NOTE: When retrieving, the procedures saved on the CD will overwrite all of the procedures on the system.
Follow this process to retrieve a protocol database from CD.
1. If necessary, connect the external CD drive.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


2. From the Worklist screen, press [UTILITIES].
Š The Utilities screen appears.
3. Select Preferences > Protocols.
4. Insert the CD with the saved protocols database into the CD tray.
5. Press [RETRIEVE].
Š A message appears: “Press OK to continue with Protocol Database retrieve.”
6. Press [OK].
Š The saved protocol database is loaded onto the system.
7. Remove the CD from the CD tray. Store the CD in a safe place.

Edit Protocol Database


The Protocol Editor allows you to create custom acquisition protocols. It allows the creation of
anatomical categories, exam sets, and individual views for exams.
It allows the edit and removal of categories, exams, and views.
NOTE: Names of categories, exams, and views cannot contain spaces. Use underscores ( _ ) to separate
words (for example, “Neck_AP”).
NOTE: It is recommended that you back up the database to CD before and after custom changes are
made. Database backup is done by pressing the [BACKUP] button on the Preferences - Protocols
screen. Refer to Backup Protocol Database to CD (p. A7-40) for more information.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-41
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Follow this process to access the Protocol Database Editor.


1. From the Worklist, select [UTILITIES].

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
2. Select Preferences > Protocols.
3. Press [EDIT].
Š The Exam Menu appears.
4. Continue with Add or Edit Category (p. A7-42), Add or Edit Exam (p. A7-43) or Add or Edit View (p. A7-
44)
Figure A7-30 Exam Menu

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Add or Edit Category
NOTE: The screens and process to edit a category are the same as for adding a category.
From the Exam Menu:

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-42
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

1. Press [ADD CAT] or [EDIT CAT].


Š If editing a category, select the category first, then click [EDIT CAT].

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Š The Add Category (or Edit Category) screen appears.

2. Type a Category Name. (Use underscores instead of spaces.)


3. From the Position Category After drop-down list, select the placement of the new category on the
category list.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


4. Press [OK].
5. Continue with Add or Edit Exam (p. A7-43).
NOTE: Exams and views must be added or copied into the new category in order for it to be fully functional.
Add or Edit Exam
NOTE: The screens and process to edit an exam are the same as for adding a exam.
From the Exam Menu:
1. Select the category for the new exam.
2. Press [ADD EXAM] or [EDIT EXAM].
Š The Add Exam (or Edit Exam) screen appears

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-43
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

3. Type an Exam Name. (Use underscores instead of spaces.)


4. From the Position Exam After drop-down list, select the position of the exam within the category.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
5. Select the Default Patient Size for the exam.
6. Press [OK].
7. Continue with Add or Edit View (p. A7-44).
NOTE: Exams must be populated with new or copied views after creation in order to be fully functional

Add or Edit View


NOTE: The screens and process to edit a view are the same as for adding a view.
This process has multiple screens.
From the Exam Menu:
1. Expand the Category.
2. Select the Exam to add or copy the new view to.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


3. Press [ADD VIEW] or [EDIT VIEW].
Š The Add View (or Edit View) screen (1 of 2) appears.

4. Type a View Name. Do not use spaces. Use underscores ( _ ) to separate words.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-44
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

5. From the Position View After drop-down list, select the placement of the view within the exam.
6. Select the Acquisition Type.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Š Available options are:
– Standard
– Bone
– Soft Tissue
7. Check if horizontal flip is to be applied when displaying the image.
8. Select the Anatomy.
NOTE: The selected anatomy will determine the image processing for the view. Be sure to select the
appropriate anatomy for the body part imaged.
9. Select the most appropriate View (AP, Lat, etc.).
Š The selected anatomy determines which views are available.
10. Select the Laterality:
Š The selected anatomy determines which laterality options are available.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


– If the anatomy is unpaired, then Unpaired is the only available selection.
– If the anatomy is paired, the available sections are: Both, Left, and Right.
– Paired anatomy enables the Patient Side control on the Image Acquisition screen. Refer to
Chapter A4: Image Acquisition for more information.
11. Select the Default Position:
Š The selected anatomy determines which positions are available. In general:
– If the anatomy is unpaired, the selections are Head Down or Head Up
– If the anatomy is paired, the selections are Digits to Back, Digits to Feet, Digits to Front, Digits to
Head.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-45
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

12. Press [NEXT].


Š The Add View (or Edit View) screen (2 of 2) appears.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
13. Select all Patient Sizes you want available for the view. The default size will automatically be selected.
14. Select Receptors and Modes for each selected receptor.
15. Select the Default Receptor - cassette or GE Portable DR Detector.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-46
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

16. Press [NEXT].


Š The Review screen appears.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
Š The default patient size is shown with an asterisk (*) to the left of the size indicator.
17. Select the patient size to edit.
18. Press [EDIT TECHNIQUE].

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-47
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

Figure A7-31 Edit Techniques screen

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
19. Change the technique parameters as appropriate.

CAUTION: If no technical factors are present in the system, the default settings are:
• kV = 50
• mA = 100 (fixed setting)
• mAs = .05
No exposures should be made until the user selects values appropriate for the patient
size.
20. Upon completion for each view, press [NEXT TECH] adjust techniques for the next configured patient
size.
21. When finished, press [EXAM MENU].
Š The Exam Menu appears.
22. Press [SAVE].
Š A message appears: “Changes made to the Protocol Database will be saved.”
Š [RESET] clears all changes to the database since the last time it was saved.
23. Press [OK].
Š The Preferences – Protocols screen appears.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-48
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

24. Press [CLOSE].


Š A message appears: “Changes have been made to the Protocol Database. Would you like to save

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
these changes?”
25. Press [YES].
Š The Exam Menu screen closes and returns you to the Preferences - Protocols screen.

Protocol Editor Copy Functions


Follow this process to access the Protocol Database Editor.
1. From the Worklist, select [UTILITIES].
2. Select Preferences > Protocols.
3. Press [EDIT].
Š The Exam Menu appears.
Figure A7-32 Exam Menu

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

4. Continue with Copy Category (p. A7-49), Copy Exam (p. A7-50), or Copy View (p. A7-50).
Copy Category
1. Select the Category to copy
2. Press [COPY CAT].
3. Enter the new name to use or retype the existing name

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-49
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

NOTE: If reusing the existing name, be sure to include any underscores in the title.
4. Select the position on the Category list.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
5. Press [OK].
6. Continue with Copy Exam (p. A7-50).

Copy Exam
1. Select the Exam to copy.
2. Press [COPY EXAM].

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


3. Enter the new name to use or retype the existing name.
4. Select the Category to copy to.
5. Select the position on the Exam list.
6. Press [OK].
7. Continue with Copy View (p. A7-50).

Copy View
1. Select the View to copy.
2. Press [COPY VIEW].
3. Enter the Exam Name to use or retype the existing name.
4. Select the Copy to Category from the list.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-50
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A7: Set Preferences

5. Select the Copy to Exam from the list.


6. Select the Position View from the list.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
7. Press [OK].

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


NOTE: Remember to back up the database when finished editing. Refer to Backup Protocol Database to
CD (p. A7-40) for more information.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A7-51
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A8: Quality Assurance Process and Maintenance

Chapter A8: Quality Assurance Process and


Maintenance

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
This chapter explains the Quality Assurance and Maintenance process for the GE Portable DR Detector.
To assure continued performance of the GE Portable DR Detector, a periodic inspection program must be
established. Daily functional checks should be part of this program.
The Quality Assurance Process (QAP) consists of a series of tests that should be performed weekly on
your system to quantify image quality. Many of the background tasks in this procedure have been
automated and require the acquisitions to be performed in the prescribed order.
Topics covered include:
• Types of Quality Tests (p. A8-1)
• When to Perform Quality Tests (p. A8-2)
• Quality Test Preparation (p. A8-2)
• Perform Detector Check (p. A8-3)
• Perform QAP (p. A8-5)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


• Result History (p. A8-11)
• Maintenance and Cleaning (p. A8-12)

Types of Quality Tests


There are two types of quality tests:
• Detector Check: A quick test to check detector quality if the detector was dropped. Detector Check
does not require making exposures and the pass or fail results are not included in the results history.
The Detector Check test can be performed in approximately 30 seconds.
• QAP: A full QAP test that requires taking exposures of a flat field phantom. The results (pass or fail) are
recorded in a results history summary for service personnel review. The QAP test can be performed in
approximately 15 minutes.
The QAP test includes all the tests that are performed for Detector Check and tests additional
factors.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A8-1
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A8: Quality Assurance Process and Maintenance

When to Perform Quality Tests


This section describes the recommended quality testing schedule and any other events that warrant

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
quality tests to be performed

Detector Check
Detector Check is used daily to check detector quality and anytime after an accidental drop.
After a detector drop, the system reports an error and displays a QAP alert icon (Figure A8-1) to indicate
that you should conduct a Detector Check test on the detector.
The Detector Check alert icon will remain until a Detector Check or QAP test is run.

QAP
QAP should be performed:
• On a scheduled, weekly basis.
• When the alert icon appears on the QAP button (Figure A8-1).
• When there is a perceived loss of image quality.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


NOTE: When scheduling QAP tests, plan 15-20 minutes to perform the test. One portion of the test requires
that the system be powered on and in an idle state (i.e., without exposures) for at least 10 minutes.
The 10 minute idle period is based upon the time from the last exposure prior to performing QAP
or system start up. The rest of the test requires approximately 5 minutes to complete.
Figure A8-1 QAP button with alert icon

Quality Test Preparation


Before starting quality tests, be sure to do the following:
• Close or suspend any open exams
• Close any exam being reviewed
• Clear all objects from detector and beam path (QAP only)
• Disconnect the unit from the charging outlet (exposures are not permitted while the unit is charging)
The QAP process begins when the QAP button is clicked. The button is located at the bottom of the
Worklist or Acquisition screen.
NOTE: QAP cannot be performed if an exam is open or being reviewed.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A8-2
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A8: Quality Assurance Process and Maintenance

Perform Detector Check


Follow this process to perform a Detector Check.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
1. Press the [QAP] button at the bottom of the Worklist or Acquisition screen.
Š The Image Quality screen appears.
Figure A8-2 Image Quality screen

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


2. Select Quality Control Tests from the left side of the screen (Figure A8-3).
Figure A8-3 QAP selection from left side of screen

Š The Quality Assurance Program screen appears.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A8-3
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A8: Quality Assurance Process and Maintenance

Figure A8-4 Quality Assurance Program screen

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
3. Press [DETECTOR CHECK].

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Š The Detector Check Tests screen appears.
Figure A8-5 Detector Check Tests screen

4. Press [START] to begin the Detector Check.


5. Wait for the test to complete.
Š The Detector Check result screen appears automatically after tests have been completed.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A8-4
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A8: Quality Assurance Process and Maintenance

Figure A8-6 Detector Check results screen

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!
Failed Detector Check
If the system fails the Detector Check (Figure A8-7), call to schedule service. The system is operational,
although inspection and potential calibration are needed.

WARNING: Image quality may be degraded if you continue to use a detector that has failed the
Detector Check tests.
Figure A8-7 Failed Detector Check results

Perform QAP
QAP involves tests requiring exposures with the flat field phantom. The GE Portable DR Detector QAP kit
includes a flat-field phantom (Figure A8-8) sized to fit the collimator.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A8-5
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A8: Quality Assurance Process and Maintenance

QAP tests require that the system be on, be idle, and that the detector not be in power save mode for at
least 10 minutes.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
IMPORTANT!: Do not use the control and display panel to change the exposure settings when
performing QAP. The exposure techniques for this calibration are automatically set up by
the calibration software. These techniques are required for proper calibration and should
not be changed by the user.
Figure A8-8 Flat-field phantom

Follow this process to perform a QAP test.


1. Press the [QAP] button at the bottom of the Worklist or Acquisition screen.
Š The Image Quality screen appears.
Figure A8-9 Image Quality screen

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


2. Select Quality Control Tests from the left side of the screen (Figure A8-10).
Figure A8-10 QAP selection from left side of screen

Š The Quality Assurance Program screen appears.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A8-6
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A8: Quality Assurance Process and Maintenance

Figure A8-11 Quality Assurance Program screen

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
3. Press [QAP].

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Š The Vertical Bar Calibration screen appears.
4. Press the [START] button to begin the Vertical Bar Calibration test.
NOTE: QAP requires that the system be in an idle state (without exposures) for at least 10 minutes before
the Vertical Bar Calibration portion of the test can begin. If the system has not been idle, a
countdown timer appears on the bottom of the screen and Vertical Bar Calibration will begin
automatically when the specified time has been reached.
Figure A8-12 Vertical Bar Calibration screen

5. Wait for the test to complete.


Š The Detector Check Tests screen appears.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A8-7
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A8: Quality Assurance Process and Maintenance

6. Follow the instructions on screen to complete this portion of the test:


Figure A8-13 Detector Check Tests screen

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
a) Verify that the detector is out of its holder.
b) Press [START] and wait for the detector check tests to be completed and results to be displayed.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Š The Detector QC Tests screen appears automatically when the Detector Check Tests are complete.
7. Follow the instructions on screen to complete this portion of the test:

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A8-8
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A8: Quality Assurance Process and Maintenance

Figure A8-14 Detector QC Tests screen

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
a) Place lead apron on floor.
b) Place detector on lead apron.
c) Manually align tube to detector using collimator field light to expose the entire detector surface.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


d) Insert flat field phantom into the collimator rail.
e) Remove the grid if necessary.
f) Set SID to 180 cm.
g) Prep and expose the flat field phantom.
Š The Detector QC Tests screen updates to show a [START] button.
8. Press [START] to begin Flat-field Tests.
Š The Flat-field tests screen appears.
9. Follow the instructions on screen to complete this portion of the test:
a) Do not reposition the system.
b) Prep and expose the flat field phantom.
Š The acquired preview image automatically appears after exposure.
10. Press anywhere on the screen to close the Preview and return to the QAP screen.
11. Prep and expose the flat field phantom again.
Š The acquired preview image automatically appears after exposure.
12. Press anywhere on the screen to close the Preview and return to the QAP screen.
Š The QAP result screen (Figure A8-15) appears automatically after tests have been completed.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A8-9
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A8: Quality Assurance Process and Maintenance

13. Review the Status (far right column) of each test.


Š If all tests PASS: QAP is complete. Click [EXIT] to return to the Worklist screen and continue work.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Š If some tests FAIL: Refer to Failed QAP (p. A8-10) for more information.
Figure A8-15 QAP Results screen

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Failed QAP
In the event of failed QAP tests, wait 10 minutes and repeat the QAP procedure to confirm the failure.
Check the items listed below when repeating the tests:
• Check collimator blades. Make sure that they are fully open and not in the field of view.
• Check that the phantom is correctly positioned.
• Check that no other objects are in the field of view.
If a single failure is confirmed, call to schedule service. The system is operational, although inspection
and potential calibration are needed.
If multiple failures are confirmed, image quality may be affected; cease use of the unit and call for
immediate service.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A8-10
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A8: Quality Assurance Process and Maintenance

Figure A8-16 Failed QAP results

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Result History
After QAP is complete, the system generates a test summary page. The result summary table contains
descriptive names, measured values, test specifications (LSL and/or USL) and pass/fail status.
A minimum of 25 QAP test results are maintained.
Follow this process to view the results of previous QAP tests.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


1. From the left pane, press [RESULT HISTORY].
Š The Result History screen appears.
2. Press a test entry in the list to select it.
3. Press [SELECT].
Š The test details appear.
Figure A8-17 QAP Result History screen

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A8-11
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A8: Quality Assurance Process and Maintenance

Maintenance and Cleaning

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Periodic Maintenance by Service Personnel
To ensure the continued safe performance of your GE Portable DR Detector, establish a periodic
maintenance program with a qualified service representative.
Periodic maintenance checks are required thirteen months after installation and every year thereafter. A
periodic maintenance schedule and a sample mAs/kVp accuracy chart are provided on the following
pages.
As the manufacturer of the GE Portable DR Detector, GE accepts no responsibility for safety, reliability or
performance unless:
• Assembly, calibration and repairs are performed by a GE authorized representative according to the
corresponding GE Portable DR Detector manuals.
• Any modification, addition or deletion to this system is authorized specifically by GE, in writing.
• Electrical installation complies with the IEC regulations.
• The device is used in accordance with the Operating Instructions.
• Original or authorized spare parts are used.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


If service of the unit is performed, the service technician must provide an official service report
describing the type and extent of repair. This service report must contain all information regarding
changes to nominal data and/or work range performed at the service visit. The service report must also
indicate the date of repair, the name of the company carrying out the repair and a valid signature. The
user should keep this service report in a safe place for future references.

Preventative Maintenance
Visually inspect the detector for signs of damage. Damage includes cracks in the magnesium or graphite
covers, dents, and scratches to the graphite cover deeper than 1.0mm.
Inspect the tether for wear (fraying, jacket tears) and replace if necessary.
Visually inspect the grid for signs of damage. This may include dents to the frame (>2mm indentation) or
signs of impact to the grid surface. Replace if necessary.
1.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A8-12
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter A8: Quality Assurance Process and Maintenance

Cleaning and Disinfecting


This equipment should be cleaned frequently, particularly if corroding chemicals are present. Use a cloth

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
moistened in warm soapy water (use mild soap) to clean the trim and nameplate of the Operator’s
Controls. Wipe with a cloth moistened in clean water.
Do not use cleaners or solvents of any kind as they may dull the finish or blur the lettering. Polish with a
pure liquid or paste wax. Other surfaces of the equipment can be cleaned using a clean cloth moistened
slightly with a good mild cleaner and polish acceptable for use on enameled metal surfaces. Before each
use, equipment surfaces that contact the patient should be cleaned with an EPA registered, low-level
disinfection or sanitizing agent.

CAUTION: In the event of equipment contacting broken skin or being used with infected or immune
compromised patients, the equipment should be cleaned using EPA cleared and EPA
registered high-level disinfecting agents.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the label instructions and pre-cautions for use, storage, and disposal of all
disinfecting agents.
NOTE: Clean the surface of the PC with a damp cloth.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Detector Cleaning
All exterior surfaces should be cleaned after each exam.
• Refer to Chapter A1: Detector Overview-Cleaning (p. A1-10) for more information about cleaning the
GE Portable DR Detector and its accessories.
• Refer to Chapter 7: Maintenance and Service-Cleaning the Unit (p. 7-1) for information about cleaning
the surface of the Definium AMX 700.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) A8-13
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Appendix B: Login Administration

Appendix B: Login Administration

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
In the effort to provide aid for our customers in complying with the Health Insurance and Portability and
Accountability Act (HIPAA), the Enterprise Access Authorization and Audit (EA3) control features have
been implemented in this product. It is the facility’s responsibility to ensure the proper usage of these
features in order to conform to the Privacy Act.
Topics covered include:
• Enabling EA3 Login (p. B-1)
• Understanding Local and Enterprise Environments (p. B-2)
• Understanding Privileges, Groups, and Users (p. B-2)
• Administering Groups and Users (p. B-3)
– Accessing the Login Administration Screens (p. B-3)
– Working with Groups (p. B-4)
¾ Add Groups (p. B-4)
¾ Assign Privileges to Groups (p. B-5)
¾ Remove Groups (p. B-5)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


¾ Show Protected Groups (p. B-5)
– Working with Users (p. B-7)
¾ Add Users (p. B-7)
¾ Assign Users to Groups (p. B-8)
¾ Change User Password (p. B-8)
¾ Remove Users (p. B-9)
¾ Show Protected Users (p. B-9)
• Viewing the Audit Log (p. B-11)
• Administering System Configuration (p. B-12)
– Change Display Settings and Enable Enterprise Authorization (p. B-12)
– Configure Enterprise Authorization (p. B-13)
– Configure Audit Log (p. B-15)
– Use LDAP Console (p. B-16)

Enabling EA3 Login


On the Service User Interface, click on the Configuration Tab and select the Advanced Options. Click on
the Radio Buttons available to Enable/ Disable the HIPAA option. By default the HIPAA option is disabled.
The Login feature can be turned on or off by your GE Field Engineer.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) B-1
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Appendix B: Login Administration

Understanding Local and Enterprise Environments


The login function may be administered at either a local or enterprise level.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Local (or stand-alone) login administration is for a piece of equipment or information system to have its
own set of login names and passwords. Each local system needs to have users with admin access set up
to administer the login function. From the user’s perspective, he or she needs a login name and
password for each piece of equipment and information system necessary to perform his or her job.
Enterprise login administration is to use the site’s existing login names and passwords to allow access to
multiple pieces of equipment and information systems throughout the site. The login function is
administered centrally by the site’s system administrator because each system sends and receives login
information over the network. From the user’s perspective, he or she only needs one login name and
password to access all equipment and systems necessary to perform his or her job.
For mobile units in an enterprise environment, login information is sent and received only when the unit
is connected to the network.

Understanding Privileges, Groups, and Users


Privileges are the rights to access a system or piece of equipment and perform certain functions.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Privileges are assigned to groups. The privileges are created by GE and cannot be changed. They are:
• GE Service allows access to all functions for service and maintenance personnel.
• Administrator allows access to the Login administration and Preferences functions in addition to
being able to add procedures to the Worklist, conduct exams, and manage images.
• Standard and Limited User only allows access to add procedures to the Worklist, conduct exams
and manage images.
Groups are categories of users that have certain privileges assigned. Users get their privileges from
groups. A user may be assigned to several groups. Groups are created and assigned privileges by a user
with GE Service or Administrator access. If you do not have an enterprise system, the assignment of
group privileges will probably be limited to those who have administrator privileges and those who don’t.
If your system is set up for enterprise login, your IT person or administrator will be using more of the
features.
When equipment is installed in an enterprise environment, the administrator configures the enterprise
groups that the equipment will use. That is, the enterprise environment will have groups for many levels
of access and job descriptions, the administrator will set the individual piece of equipment to use a sub-
set of those groups.
Users are individuals who have permission to use a particular system. Users are created and assigned to
groups by a user with GE Service or Administrator access. These administrators may be IT personnel in
an enterprise environment, or a site manager or lead tech in stand-alone environments. The
administrator adds new users and assigns the users to a group which dictates the level of privileges a
person will have. For example, a person named Sue Smith could belong to a group called technologists,
radiologists, administrators, or any combination.
When configuring a system (enterprise or local) always create the groups and assign group privileges
first, then add individual users to the groups.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) B-2
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Appendix B: Login Administration

Administering Groups and Users


This section describes how to perform the tasks relating to administering the login function.

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Accessing the Login Administration Screens
Follow this process to gain access to the login administration screens.
Follow this process to log on to the system.
1. Start up the system or log off the previous user.
Š The Login screen appears.
2. Type in your Login Name.
3. Type in your Password.
4. Click [LOGIN].
Š If you have administrator access, a message (Figure B-1) appears: “You have both regular user
and admin user privileges. To access the admin screen, select the check box before continuing
with the login, otherwise just continue with the login.”

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Š If the message does not appear, then you do not have access to the login
administration functions.
5. Select the Enter admin screen checkbox.
6. Click [LOGIN].
Š The Login Administration screen appears.
Š [CANCEL] closes the message and returns you to the main Login screen.
7. Click [EXIT] on the bottom of any login administration screen to return to the standard login screen.
Figure B-1 Administrator access message

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) B-3
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Appendix B: Login Administration

Working with Groups


The Group and Permissions Mapping tab (Figure B-2) allows you to add groups, remove groups, and

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
assign privileges to groups. On this screen, the four privileges categories are at the top of the screen
(columns) and the group names are at the left edge of the screen (rows).
Figure B-2 Group and Permissions Mapping tab

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Add Groups
1. Select the Group and Permissions Mapping tab, if necessary.
2. Click [ADD GROUP].
3. Type a name for the group in the text box that appears near the bottom of the screen (Figure B-3).
Figure B-3 Add group text box

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) B-4
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Appendix B: Login Administration

NOTE: Remember the following when creating group names:


– Group names cannot have spaces or uppercase (capital) letters. Use all lowercase letters in

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
the group name and use underscores to separate words.
– The group name must be unique. That is, the system will not allow two groups to have the
same name.
4. Click [ADD LOCAL GROUP] or [ADD ENTERPRISE GROUP] as appropriate.
Š The new group name is added to the table.
Š If the group name cannot be used you will receive a message that informs you of the problem.
Type the correct information and click [SUBMIT] again.
Assign Privileges to Groups
1. Click a group name to select it.
2. Select the checkbox under the privilege heading. Refer to Understanding Privileges, Groups, and
Users (p. B-2) for definitions of privileges.
NOTE: The Service privilege is protected and cannot be selected. Only GE Service personnel can assign a
group to the Service privilege.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


3. Click on a selected checkbox to remove the privilege.
NOTE: You may select or deselect privileges for multiple groups.
4. Click [APPLY GROUP SETTINGS].
Š A message appears: “Apply group settings.”
5. Click [APPLY NOW].
Remove Groups
1. Click a group name to select it.
NOTE: You are able to only delete one group at a time.
2. Click [REMOVE GROUP].
Š A message appears: “Remove Group (name)?”
3. Click [REMOVE NOW].
Show Protected Groups
There is a class of groups identified as protected groups. The privileges assigned to these groups can
only be modified by a GE Service Engineer.
Select the Show Protected Groups checkbox to see these groups. Protected groups and privileges are
shown with a violet (light purple) background.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) B-5
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Appendix B: Login Administration

Figure B-4 Protected groups

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) B-6
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Appendix B: Login Administration

Working with Users


The Local User Management tab (Figure B-5) allows you to add users, assign users to groups, change

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
user passwords, and remove users. On this screen, the available groups are at the top of the screen
(columns) and the user names are on the left edge of the screen (rows).
Figure B-5 Local User Management tab

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Add Users
1. Select the Local User Management tab, if necessary.
2. Click [ADD USER].
Š Five text boxes appear near the bottom of the screen (Figure B-6).
Figure B-6 Add user text boxes

3. Type a Username.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) B-7
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Appendix B: Login Administration

NOTE: Remember the following when creating user names:


– You cannot use the names “operator”, “admin”, or “administrator.” These names are reserved

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
for use by the system and GE Service personnel.
– User names cannot have spaces or uppercase (capital) letters. Use all lowercase letters in
the username and use underscores to separate words.
– User names cannot have special characters: ~!@#%^&*()+=[]{}\|:;’”,.<>/?
– The User name must be unique. That is, the system will not allow two people to have the
same user name.
4. Type the user’s First Name.
Š This text box may be left blank but it is recommended that you type a name.
NOTE: Capital letters, spaces, and punctuation are allowed in the First Name and Last Name text boxes.
5. Type the user’s Last Name.
Š This text box may be left blank but it is recommended that you type a name.
6. Type a Password.
NOTE: The default system does not have pre-configured standards for password format or construction;

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


however, your facility may have password standards that must be followed. Ask your facility’s
System Administrator about password standards and create passwords that conform to those
standards.
7. Re-type the password in the Confirm Password text box.
NOTE: The passwords must match exactly to be accepted.
8. Click [SUBMIT].
Š The new user is added to the table.
Š If the Username cannot be used or if the passwords do not match, you will receive a message that
informs you of the problem. Type the correct information and click [SUBMIT] again.
Assign Users to Groups
1. Select the checkbox under the group heading to add the user to that group.
2. Click on a selected checkbox to remove the user from the group.
NOTE: You may select or deselect groups for multiple users.
NOTE: You cannot change the group assignments for protected users.
3. Click [APPLY USER SETTINGS].
Change User Password
You cannot see user’s passwords for security reasons. In the event of a forgotten password, you may
change the password and then tell the user the new password.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) B-8
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Appendix B: Login Administration

1. Click a user name to select it.


2. Click [CHANGE PASSWORD].

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Š The Password and Change Password text boxes appear.
Figure B-7 Change password

3. Type a password into the New Password field.


NOTE: The default system does not have pre-configured standards for password format or construction;
however, your facility may have password standards that must be followed. Ask your facility’s
System Administrator about password standards and create passwords that conform to those
standards.
4. Re-type the password into the Confirm Password field.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


5. Click [SUBMIT].
Remove Users
1. Click a user name to select it.
NOTE: You cannot delete protected users.
2. Click [REMOVE GROUP].
Š A message appears: “Remove User xxx?”
3. Click [REMOVE NOW].
Show Protected Users
There is a class of users identified as protected users. The privileges assigned to these users can only be
modified by a GE Service Engineer.
Select the Show Protected Users checkbox to see these users. Protected users and groups are shown
with a violet (light purple) background.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) B-9
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Appendix B: Login Administration

Figure B-8 Protected users

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) B-10
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Appendix B: Login Administration

Viewing the Audit Log


The audit log provides information about who has accessed the system, when the system has been

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
accessed, and the type of login (that is, emergency logins). The log settings are configured through the
Configuration-Audit Log tab. Refer to Configure Audit Log (p. B-15) for more information.
Figure B-9 Log Viewer tab

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) B-11
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Appendix B: Login Administration

Administering System Configuration


The Configuration tab (Figure B-10) allows you to perform several tasks that effect how the login function

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
works.
When the Configuration tab is selected, another row of tabs appears. The following sections describe the
controls available for each tab.

Change Display Settings and Enable Enterprise Authorization


The Configuration-Configuration tab (Figure B-10) allows you to set the inactivity timeout period, control
whether the Emergency Login button appears, and to enable enterprise authorization.
Table B-1 describes each function.
Figure B-10 Configuration-Configuration tab

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) B-12
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Appendix B: Login Administration

Table B-1 Configuration function descriptions

Function Description

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Inactivity timeout This function is not implemented for the Definium AMX 700.
IMPORTANT!: Do not enable or change the setting on this function.
Enabling or changing this function may cause conflicts with
the system software.
Sets the number of minutes before automatic logout will occur. For
example, if you enter 10 minutes, the system will display the splash screen
after 10 minutes of inactivity (no keyboard entry or mouse movements),
requiring the user to log in. When logging back in, the system is returned
to its last know state.
To disable inactivity timeout, enter “0”.

Display Emergency Allows the Emergency Login button to be shown on the Login screen. If
Button this button is not displayed, only those users with a valid account can log
onto the system.

Display Emergency When the [EMERGENCY LOGIN] button is clicked, displays a prompt that
Prompt requires emergency users enter their names.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!


Cache Enterprise Users Allows all users previously set up on the system to log in even if the site
network is down.

Enable Enterprise Verifies users and what privileges they have based on the network
Authentication settings at your site.

Enable Authorization For facilities with enterprise login, enables checking group membership
before allowing users to enter the system. With authorization, you must
add user groups to the group tab in order to let people log in.

[APPLY Applies the settings.


CONFIGURATION]

[RESTORE] Restores the setting to the last applied configuration. That is, when the
[APPLY CONFIGURATION] button was last clicked.

Configure Enterprise Authorization


The Configure-Enterprise Tab is used by the site’s IT (Information Technology) or GE Service personnel. It
provides connectivity to the site’s user database. If you do not have a network established in your facility,
this tab will not be used.
When the fields on the left side of the screen are completed, press [GENERATE DEFAULTS] to auto-
populate the fields on the right side with suggested defaults. Modify the information as appropriate.
Press [APPLY CONFIGURATION] to apply the settings.
The [RESTORE] button resets the tab to the last saved settings.

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) B-13
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Appendix B: Login Administration

Figure B-11 Configuration-Enterprise tab

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) B-14
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Appendix B: Login Administration

Configure Audit Log


If enterprise authorization is enabled, this tab controls if audit logging is to be enables, which hosts will be

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
tracked, and the number of events to track.
Click [SUBMIT] to apply the settings.
Figure B-12 Configuration -Audit Log tab

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) B-15
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Appendix B: Login Administration

Use LDAP Console


Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) functions are available from the Configuration-LDAP

NOTE: Once downloaded, this document is UNCONTROLLED, and therefore may not be the latest revision. Always confirm revision status against a validated source (ie CDL).
Console tab.
Figure B-13 Configuration-LDAP Console tab

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY!

Definium AMX 700 X-Ray System 5161515-1EN Rev. 6 (10 February 2008) B-16
Operator Manual © 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.

You might also like